Trimble TSC2, CU, VX/S Survey Controller Help

to specify ground, grid, or sea level distances.

3. Enter the name of the line.

4. For stationing, enter a value for the Start station and the Station interval.

To define a new line by the Brng-dist from a point method:

1. From the main menu, select Key in / Line.

2. Use

Intersect point and tangents

to specify ground, grid or sea level distances.

3. Enter the name of the line.

4. In the Method field, select Brng-dist from a point.

5. Enter the name of the Start point (1), the azimuth (2), and the length of line (3). See the diagram below.

6. Specify the Grade between the start and end points.

7. For stationing, enter a value for the Start station and the Station interval.

Key in - Arcs

Use this function to define a new arc by one of the following methods:

Two points and radius

Arc length and radius

Delta angle and radius

Two points and center point

Three points

The following diagram and table explains the terms used to define features of an arc.

1 Center point 6 Back tangent

2 Delta angle 7 Intersection point

3 Radius 8 Tangent length

4 Chord length 9 Forward tangent

5 From point 10 To point

The back tangent value (6) is related to the direction (right in the above diagram) in which the stationing or chainage increases. For example, when you stand at the intersection point (7) looking in the direction of increasing stationing or chainage, the forward tangent (9) is in front of you and the back tangent (6) is behind you.

The direction field defines whether the arc turns to the left (counterclockwise) or right (clockwise) from the start point (1) to the end point (2). The following diagram shows both a left (3) and right (4) arc.

To define an arc using the Two points and radius method:

1. From the main menu, select Key in / Arc.

2. Use

to specify ground, grid, or sea level distances.

3. Enter the name of the arc.

4. In the Method field, select Two points and radius.

5. As shown in the diagram below, enter the name of the start point (1), the name of the end point (2), and the radius (3) of the arc.

6. Specify the direction of the arc.

7. For stationing, enter a value for the start station and the station interval.

To define an arc using the Arc length and radius method:

1. From the main menu, select Key in / Arc.

2. Use

softkey to specify ground, grid, or sea level distances and the grade entry method.

3. Enter the name of the arc.

4. In the Method field, select Arc length and radius.

5. As shown in the diagram below, enter the name of the start point (1), the back tangent (2), the radius

(3)and the length of the arc.

6. Specify the direction of the arc and the grade between the start and end points.

7. For stationing, enter a value for the start station and the station interval.

To define an arc using the Delta angle and radius method:

1. From the main menu, select Key in / Arc.

2. Use

to specify ground, grid, or sea level distances and the grade entry method.

3. Enter the name of the arc.

4. In the Method field, select Delta angle and radius.

5. As shown in the diagram below, enter the name of the start point (1), the back tangent (2), the radius

(3) and the turned angle (4) of the arc.

6. Specify the direction of the arc and the grade between the start and end points.

7. For stationing, enter a value for the start station and the station interval.

To define an arc using the Intersect point and tangents method:

1. From the main menu, select Key in / Arc.

2. Use

to specify ground, grid or sea level distances.

3. Enter the name of the arc.

4. In the Method field, select Intersect point and tangents.

5. As shown in the diagram below, enter the name of the intersection point (1), the back tangent (2), the forward tangent (3) and the radius (4) of the arc.

6. For stationing, enter a value for the start station and the station interval.

To define an arc using the Two points and center point method:

1. From the main menu, select Key in / Arc.

2. Use

to specify ground, grid or sea level distances.

3. Enter the name of the arc.

4. In the Method field, select Two points and center point.

5. Specify the direction of the arc.

6. As shown in the diagram below, enter the name of the Start point (1), the End point (2), and the

Center point (3) of the arc.

7. For stationing, enter a value for the start station and the station interval.

To define an arc using the Three points method:

1. From the main menu, select Key in / Arc.

2. Use

Stakeout - alignments (polylines)

to specify ground, grid or sea level distances.

3. Enter the name of the arc.

4. In the Method field, select Three points.

5. As shown in the diagram below, enter the name of the Start point (1), the Point on arc (2), and the

End point (3) of the arc.

6. For stationing, enter a value for the start station and the station interval.

The grade of the arc is determined by the elevations of the arc start and end points.

Key in - Alignments

To key in an alignment by a point name range:

1. From the main menu, select Key in / Alignments.

2. To key in a new alignment, enter the point names that define the alignment (if the Key in alignment screen is displayed). If the Select an alignment screen is displayed, tap New to enter the point range.

The following name range techniques are supported:

Enter

1,3,5

1-10

1,3,5-10

1(2)3

Result

Creates a line between points 1 to 3 to 5

Creates lines between all points from 1 through 10

Creates a line between points 1 to 3, to 5, and 5 through 10

Creates an arc between points 1 and 3, through point 2

1(2,L)3

1(100,L,S)3

2 (Radius point), L (left) or R (right)

Creates a Left hand arc between points 1 and 3, with point 2 as the radius point

1 to 3, radius=100, L (left) or R (right), L (large) or S (small)

Creates a Left hand Small arc between points 1 and 3 with a radius of 100

3. To store the alignment, enable the Store alignment check box, enter an Alignment name, enter a Code and Station interval if required, and then tap Store.

Alignments are stored as RXL files. If you save the alignment, you can easily stake it again, view it in the map, and share it with other jobs and with other controllers.

Alignments always have a horizontal component; the vertical component is optional. If an alignment is created using entities that have elevations, the alignment will have a vertical component.

4. To offset an alignment, tap Offset.

5. Enter the offset distance.

To offset to the left, enter a negative value.

6. To store the offset alignment, enable the Store alignment check box, enter an Alignment name, enter a

Code, if required, and then tap Store. The alignment is stored as an RXL file.

7. To store node points at the vertices of the offset alignment, enable the Store points at nodes check box, enter a Start point name, enter a Code, if required, and then tap Store.

An offset alignment will have a vertical component if the vertical geometry of the original alignment is coincident with the horizontal geometry and the vertical geometry consists only of points. The offset vertical geometry cannot include curves. If the vertical geometry of an alignment cannot be offset, only the horizontal component will exist in the offset alignment. You cannot offset an alignment that includes spirals.

For more information, see:

•

Key in - Roads

Use this option to:

•

Key in

and edit a Trimble road

•

Key in

and edit an Alignment

•

Create

and edit a group from a GENIO file

Keyed-in roads (known as Trimble roads) are saved to the current project folder as 'road name'.rxl. Trimble roads are available for all jobs saved to the current project folder.

Alignment files keyed in using Key in road, or created from the map, or during Stakeout Alignment are saved as .rxl files in the current project folder.

To use a file saved to the current project folder in another project, use Windows Explorer to copy or move the file to the appropriate project folder.

Groups defined from a GENIO file are saved as a comment to the end of the GENIO file. GENIO files and associated groups are available for all jobs.

Trimble roads

To key in a Trimble road:

1. From the main menu, select Key in / Roads.

2. Tap New and enter a name for the road definition. (To edit an existing road, highlight the road name and tap Edit.)

Tip - Use the Copy option to copy an existing road definition with all its components into the current road.

3. Choose a component to key in:

Horizontal Alignment

Vertical Alignment

Template Positioning

Superelevation and Widening

Templates

Station Equations

4. Tap Store when all components have been defined.

5. Tap the Report softkey to generate a report of the offset, elevation, and code for each position in the cross section for the selected stations. The values reported are for the resolved cross sections, that is, they include any superelevation and widening values that may have been applied, and any interpolation between different templates.

Tip - Use Rename and Delete to rename or delete a road definition.

Notes

•

The Trimble Survey Controller software treats all road distances, including stationing and offset values, as grid distances. The value in the Distances field (accessed by selecting Files / Properties of

current job - Cogo settings) has no effect on the road definition or the way road distances are

• displayed.

If a ground coordinate system is defined in either the Trimble Geomatics or Trimble Survey

•

Controller software, then the grid coordinates are, in effect, also ground coordinates.

Alignment files are saved as .rxl files - the same format as Trimble roads.

•

Alignments can be created or edited using Key in Trimble roads.

•

Alignment files created from the map, or during Stakeout Alignment, contain a Horizontal alignment.

If elevations exist, the files also contain a Vertical alignment.

Horizontal Alignment

To add a horizontal alignment to a new road definition, select Horizontal alignment. You can enter the alignment using one of the following methods:

♦

Length / Coordinates

♦

End station

♦

Entry by Length / Coordinates

To add a horizontal alignment to a new road definition by entering the lengths of the elements or the end coordinates, select Horizontal alignment and then do the following:

1. Tap New to enter the first element that defines the alignment. The Element field is set to Start point.

You cannot change this.

2. Enter the Start station.

3. In the Method field, choose one of the following options:

♦

Key in coordinates

♦

Select point

If you choose the Key in coordinates method, enter values in the Start north and Start east fields.

If you choose the Select point method field, enter a value in the Point name field. The Start north and

Start east fields will update with the values for the entered point.

Tip - To edit the Start north and Start east values when they have been derived from a point, change the method to Key in coordinates.

4. Enter the Station interval. To add the horizontal element, tap Store.

5. To enter the next horizontal element, tap New. In the Entry Method field, select Length/Coordinates and then tap OK.

6. Select the Element and Method, enter the required information and then tap Store. For details on supported elements and entry methods, see the following:

7. When you have entered the last element, tap Accept.

Tip - To delete an element, highlight it and tap Delete. When you add an element, it appears below the previous element that you added. To insert it at a particular place in the list, highlight the element that you want it to follow. Tap New and enter details of the element.

8. Enter the other road components or tap Store to store the road definition.

Line elements

If you select Line in the Element field, the Start station field displays the start station value for the line that you are defining. You cannot edit this.

The following table shows the available methods and the fields that appear when you select each one.

Method

Azimuth and length

End coordinates

Select end point

Procedure

In the Azimuth and Length fields, enter values that define the line. The End north and End

east fields update with the values entered.

In the End north and End east fields, enter values that define the line. The Azimuth and

Length fields update with the values entered.

In the Point name field, enter a value. The Azimuth, Length, End north, and End east fields update with the values entered.

Tip - For a line defined by Azimuth and length, the Azimuth field shows the azimuth as calculated from the previous element. To edit the azimuth, select Edit azimuth from the pop-up menu in the Azimuth field. If the element is non tangential, its icon is red. To reload the original azimuth, select Restore tangency from the pop-up menu.

Arc elements

If you select Arc in the Element field, the Start station field displays the start station value for the arc that you are defining. You cannot edit this.

The following table shows the available methods and the fields that appear when you select each one.

Method Procedure

Radius and length Specify arc direction. In the Radius and Length fields, enter values that define the arc.

Delta angle and radius

Deflection angle and length

Specify arc direction. In the Angle and Radius fields, enter values that define the arc.

Specify arc direction. In the Angle and Length fields, enter values that define the arc.

End coordinates

Select end point

End coordinates and center point

Select end and center points

In the End north and End east fields, enter values that define the arc.The Arc direction,

Radius, and Length fields update with the values entered.

In the Point name field, enter a value that defines the arc. The Arc direction, Radius,

Length, End north, and End east fields update with the values entered.

In the End north, End east, Center point north, and Center point east fields, enter values that define the arc. If required select Large arc. The Azimuth, Arc direction Radius, and

Length fields update with the values entered.

In the End point name and Center point name fields, enter values that define the arc. If required select Large arc. The Azimuth, Arc direction, Radius, Length, End north and

End east fields update with the values entered.

Tip - For an arc defined by Radius and length, Delta angle and radius or Deflection angle and length, the

Azimuth field shows the azimuth as calculated from the previous element. If the element is non tangential, its icon is red. To reload the original azimuth, select Restore tangency from the pop-up menu.

Entry spiral/Exit spiral elements

If you select Entry spiral/Exit spiral in the Element field, the Start station field displays the start station value for the entry spiral or exit spiral that you are defining. You cannot edit this.

Specify the arc direction. In the Start radius, End radius and Length fields, enter values that define the spiral.

The End North and End East fields update to display the coordinates at the end of the element just added.

The Azimuth field displays the azimuth as calculated from the previous element. To edit the azimuth, select

Edit azimuth from the pop-up menu in the Azimuth field. The software indicates that the element is non tangential by coloring the element icon red.

Tip - To reload the original azimuth select Restore tangency from the pop-up menu.

Note - Spirals are defined as Clothoids.

Entry by End station

To add a horizontal alignment to a new road definition by entering end station values, select Horizontal

alignment and then do the following:

1. Tap New to enter the first element that defines the alignment. The Element field is set to Start point.

You cannot change this.

2. Enter the Start station.

3. In the Method field, choose one of the following options:

♦

Key in coordinates

♦

Select point

If you choose the Key in coordinates method, enter values in the Start north and Start east fields.

If you choose the Select point method field, enter a value in the Point name field. The Start north and

Start east fields will update with the values for the entered point.

Tip - To edit the Start north and Start east values when they have been derived from a point, change the method to Key in coordinates.

4. Enter the Station interval. To add the horizontal element, tap Store.

5. To enter the next horizontal element, tap New. In the Entry Method field select End station and then tap OK.

6. Select the Element and Method, enter the required information and then tap Store. For details on supported elements and entry methods, see the following:

8. When you have entered the last element, tap Accept.

9. Enter the other road components or tap Store to store the road definition.

Tip - Tap Method to change the entry method to Length.

Line elements

If you select Line in the Element field , the Start station field displays the start station value for the line that you are defining. You cannot edit this.

In the Azimuth and End station fields, enter values that define the line. The End North and End East fields update to display the coordinates at the end of the element just added.

If this line is not the first line to be defined, the Azimuth field displays an azimuth calculated from the previous element. To edit the azimuth, select Edit azimuth from the pop-up menu in the Azimuth field. The software indicates that the element is non tangential by coloring the element icon red.

Tip - To reload the original azimuth select Restore tangency from the pop-up menu.

Arc elements

If you select Arc in the Element field, the Start station field displays the start station value for the arc that you are defining. You cannot edit this.

The following table shows the available methods and the fields that appear when you select each one.

Method

Radius and end station

Deflection angle and end station

Procedure

Specify arc direction. In the Radius and End station fields, enter values that define the arc.

Specify arc direction. In the Angle and End station fields, enter values that define the arc.

The End North and End East fields update to display the coordinates at the end of the element just added.

The Azimuth field displays the azimuth as calculated from the previous element. To edit the azimuth, select

Edit azimuth from the pop-up menu in the Azimuth field. The software indicates that the element is non

tangential by coloring the element icon red.

Tip - To reload the original azimuth select Restore tangency from the pop-up menu.

Entry spiral/Exit spiral elements

If you select Entry spiral/Exit spiral in the Element field, the Start station field displays the start station value for the entry spiral or exit spiral that you are defining. You cannot edit this.

Specify arc direction. In the Start radius, End radius and End station fields, enter values that define the spiral.

The End North and End East fields update to display the coordinates at the end of the element just added.

The Azimuth field displays the azimuth as calculated from the previous element. To edit the azimuth, select

Edit azimuth from the pop-up menu in the Azimuth field. The software indicates that the element is non tangential by coloring the element icon red.

Tip - To reload the original azimuth select Restore tangency from the pop-up menu.

Note - Spirals are defined as Clothoids.

Entry by PI

To add a horizontal alignment to a new road definition by entering the points of intersection (PI), select

Horizontal alignment and then do the following:

1. Tap New to enter the first element that defines the alignment. The Element field is set to Start point.

You cannot change this.

2. Enter the Start station.

3. In the Method field, choose one of the following options:

♦

Key in coordinates

♦

Select point

If you choose the Key in coordinates method, enter values in the Start north and Start east fields.

If you choose the Select point method field, enter a value in the Point name field. The Start north and

Start east fields will update with the values for the entered point.

Tip - The selected entry method will be the default for subsequent elements. To change the entry method, select the Method option.

Tip - To edit the Start north and Start east values when they have been derived from a point, change the method to Key in coordinates.

4. Enter the Station interval. To add the horizontal element, tap Store.

5. To enter the next horizontal element tap New. In the Entry method field, select PI and then tap OK.

6. Tap New and select the Curve type, enter the required information, and then tap Store. For details on

supported curve types, see the following:

None

Circular

Spiral|Arc|Spiral

Spiral|Spiral

8. When you have entered the last element, tap Accept.

9. Enter the other road components or tap Store to store the road definition.

Curve type: None

Define the PI and then select None in the Curve type field.

Curve type: Circular

Define the PI and then select Circular in the Curve type field. Enter values defining the Radius and Arc length and then tap Store .

Curve type: Spiral|Arc|Spiral

Define the PI and then select Spiral|Arc|Spiral in the Curve type field. Enter values defining the Radius, Arc

length, Spiral length in, and Spiral length out and then tap Store.

Note - Spirals are defined as Clothoids.

Curve type: Spiral|Spiral

Define the PI and then select Spiral|Spiral in the Curve type field. Enter values defining the Radius, Spiral

length in, and Spiral length out and then tap Store.

Note - Spirals are defined as Clothoids.

Vertical Alignment

To add a vertical alignment to a new road definition, select Vertical alignment. You can enter the alignment using one of the following methods:

•

Vertical Points of Intersection

•

Start and end points

Note - The selected entry method applies to all elements defining the vertical alignment.

Entry by Vertical Points of Intersection (VPI)

To add a vertical alignment to a new road definition by entering Vertical Points of Intersection (VPI), select

Vertical alignment and then follow these steps:

1. To enter the first element that defines the alignment, tap New.

2. In the Station and Elevation fields, key in the values that define the first vertical point of intersection.

The Element field is set to Start point. You cannot change this.

3. Tap Store to add the vertical element record.

4. Tap New. In the entry method field select VPI and then tap Ok.

5. Select the Element, enter the required information and then tap Store. For details on supported elements, see the following:

Asymmetric parabola elements

6. When you have entered the last element, tap Accept.

7. Enter the other road components or tap Store to store the road definition.

Point elements

If you select Point in the Element field, use the Station and Elevation fields to key in values that define the VPI. The Slope in field updates to display the calculated slope value. The Slope out field updates when the next element is added.

Note - A vertical alignment defined by VPIs must end with a point.

Circular arc elements

to display the calculated slope value. The Length, K factor and Slope out fields update when the next element is added.

Symmetric parabola elements

If you select Sym parabola in the Element field, use the Station and Elevation fields to key in values that define the VPI and a length for the parabola. The Slope in field updates to display the calculated slope value. The K factor and Slope out fields update when the next element is added.

Asymmetric parabola elements

If you select Asymmetric parabola in the Element field, use the Station and Elevation fields to key in values that define the VPI. Enter the In and Out lengths of the parabola.The Slope in field updates to display the calculated slope value. The K factor and Slope out fields update when the next element is added.

Note - When you edit an element, only the selected element is updated. All adjoining elements remain unchanged.

Tip - To confirm the entry, use the Slope in, Slope out, K factor and Sag / Summit values.

Entry by start and end points

To add a vertical alignment to a new road definition by entering Start and end points, select Vertical

alignment and then follow these steps:

1. To enter the first element that defines the alignment, tap New.

2. In the Station and Elevation fields, key in the values that define the first vertical point of intersection.

The Element field is set to Start point. You cannot change this.

3. Tap Store to add the vertical element record.

4. Tap New. In the entry method field select Start and End points and then tap Ok.

5. Select the Element, enter the required information and then tap Store. For details on supported elements, see the following:

example alignment with the associated table. That topic shows how the

6. When you have entered the last element, tap Accept.

7. Enter the other road components or tap Store to store the road definition.

Point elements

If you select Point in the Element field, use the Station and Elevation fields to key in values that define the start point. The Slope in field updates to display the calculated slope value. The Slope out field updates when the next element is added.

Circular arc elements

If you select Circular arc in the Element field, use the Start station, Start elevation, End station, End

elevation, and Radius fields to key in values that define the circular arc. The Length, Slope in, and

Slope out fields update to display the calculated values.

Symmetric parabola elements

If you select Sym parabola in the Element field, use the Start station, Start elevation, End station, End

elevation, and K factor fields to key in values that define the parabola. The Length, Slope in, and

Slope out fields update to display the calculated values.

Note - When you edit an element, only the selected element is updated. All adjoining elements remain unchanged.

Tip - To confirm the entry, use the Slope in, Slope out, K factor and Sag / Summit values.

Template Positioning

Define the position of templates in a road definition by specifying the station at which the Trimble Survey

Controller software starts to apply each template. A template is applied at the start station and template element values are then interpolated linearly (applied on a pro rata basis) from that point to the station where the next template is applied.

To define the template positioning:

1. Select Template positioning.

2. Tap New.

3. In the Start station field, specify the start station for the template(s).

4. Select the templates to apply. The options in the drop-down list for the Left template and Right

template fields are as follows:

♦

<None> - no template is assigned. Use this option to create a gap in the road definition.

♦

<Interpolate> - the template for this station is interpolated from the previous and next

♦ templates in the road definition.

Templates - defined using the Key in / Templates option.

6. Tap Store to apply the templates.

7. Tap New to enter more templates at other positions.

8. When all template positions are entered tap Accept.

Tip - To delete a highlighted entry, tap Delete.

9. Enter the other road components or tap Store to store the road definition.

For more information, see the

template assignments, including the templates "None" and "Interpolate", can be used to achieve the required road definition.

Roading Template - Example Alignment

The following discussion explains how positioning of templates and use of system templates can be used to control a Trimble road definition. See the plan in the following figure.

Right side of the road

On the right side, template 1 is assigned to stations 0 and 20. The road transitions from template 1 at station

20 to template 2 at station 70. Because a template must be assigned at station 40 on the left side, the system template <Interpolate> 3 must be assigned to the right side of the road to maintain correct interpolation.

To correctly represent the gap between stations 70 and 90, the system template <None> 4 is assigned at a nominal distance after station 70 (5 mm). To complete the right side of the road, template 2 is assigned to stations 90, 120, and 120.005.

Left side of the road

On the left side, template 1 is assigned to stations 0, 20, and 40. The road transitions from template 1 at station

40 to template 2 at station 70. To correctly represent the design, template 1 is assigned a nominal distance after station 120 (5 mm).

Assign the templates at the specified start stations as shown in the following table:

Start station Left templates Right templates

0.000

Template 1 Template 1

20.000

40.000

Template 1

<Interpolate> 3

70.000

70.005

90.000

120.000

120.005

Template 2

Template 1

Template 2

<None> 4

Template 2

Cross section Interpolation

The two methods of interpolating between cross sections are:

• by elevation

• by cross slope

To specify the interpolation method

1. Select Files / Properties of current job and then select Cogo settings.

2. From the Road cross section interpolation by field, select Elevation or Cross slope.

3. Tap Accept.

Interpolation by elevation

See the following figure where the template at station 100 includes a first element with an end elevation of 10.0. The next template is assigned at station 400 and has a first element with an end elevation of 7.0. The cross section for stations 200 and 300 are interpolated as shown to provide even grading of elevation from station 100 to 400.

Interpolation by cross slope

See the following figure where the template at station 100 includes a first element with a crossfall of

-2%. The next template is assigned at station 400 and has a first element with a crossfall of -5%. The cross section for stations 200 and 300 are interpolated as shown to provide even grading of cross slope from station 100 to 400.

Interpolating between templates that have a different number of design elements

For templates with an unequal number of design line elements, the template with the least elements has zero length elements added before the side slope element. The interpolation is then performed given an equal number of elements exist. See the figure below, where a zero length element 3 has automatically been inserted.

By adding zero length template elements, you can further control the interpolation process to best represent the road design.

Notes

•

If the design requires a gap in its definition use the None templates.

•

No interpolation occurs between a null and a valid template.

•

Templates are interpolated after superelevation and widening have been applied.

Interpolation of side slopes

If consecutive templates contain side slopes of differing values intermediate stations have side slopes interpolated based on the slope value as a percentage.

For example, if the side slope value at station 600 is 50% (1:2) and at station 800 it is 16.67% (1:6) the side slope value at station 700 will be 50% + 16.7% / 2 = 33.33% (1:3).

Superelevation and Widening

Define where superelevation and widening values are applied in a road definition by specifying the station at which the Trimble Survey Controller software starts to apply them. Superelevation and widening values are applied at the start station, and values are then interpolated linearly (applied on a pro rata basis) from that point to the station where the next superelevation and widening values are applied.

To add superelevation and widening values to a new road definition:

1. Select Superelevation & widening and tap New.

2. In the Start station field, specify the station where the superelevation and widening starts.

3. In the Left super and Right super fields, enter superelevation values for the left and right sides of the horizontal alignment.

Tip - To change the way a superelevation value is expressed, tap Options and change the Grade field as required.

4. In the Pivot field, specify the position about which the template rotates. The options are Pivot left,

Pivot crown, and Pivot right.

Notes

♦

For Pivot left the pivot position is the maximum offset, left of the centerline, of the last

♦ template element with superelevation applied.

For Pivot crown the pivot position is at the centerline.

♦

For Pivot right the pivot position is the maximum offset, right of the centerline, of the last template element with superelevation applied.

5. In the Left widening field, enter the widening value to be applied.

This value is applied to each element in the template that has the Widening check box selected.

6. Do the same for the Right widening field. Tap Store to add these superelevation and widening values to the road definition.

Note - Widening is expressed as a positive value.

7. To enter more superelevation and widening records tap New.

8. After entering the last superelevation and widening record, tap Accept.

Tip - To delete an entry, highlight it and tap Delete.

9. Enter the other road components, or tap Store to store the road definition.

Templates

To define a template for a new road definition, select Templates and then do the following:

1. Tap New, enter a template name and then tap OK.

To edit an existing template, highlight the template name, tap Edit, select the element to edit from the graphical template view and then tap Edit again.

Tip - Use the Copy option to copy an existing template defintion into the current template.

3. Tap New to enter the first element defining the template.

4. Select an option from the Element field and enter the required information. For more information, see the appropriate section below.

Crossfall and offset

Delta elevation and offset

Side slope

5. To add the template element, tap Store. The element is added, and appears in the grapical template view. When you add an element, it appears after the previous element that you added. To insert it at a particular place, highlight the element in the graphical view that you want it to follow. Tap New and then enter details for the element.

Tip - To delete an element, highlight it and tap Delete.

6. To enter more elements that define this template, tap New.

6. When you have entered the last element, tap Accept.

7. To save the template, tap Accept.

Tip - To rename a template, highlight it and then tap Rename. To delete a template, tap Delete.

Crossfall and offset

If you selected Crossfall and Offset in the Element field:

1. In the Crossfall and Offset fields, enter the values that define the element.

Tip - To change the way a crossfall value is expressed, tap Options and change the Grade field as required.

2. Enter a value in the Code field (this step is optional).

Tip - The annotation entered in the Code field is assigned to the end of the element and is displayed during stakeout.

3. Select the Apply superelevation and Apply widening check boxes as required.

Note - The Apply widening check box is only available after the Apply superelevation check box has been selected.

Delta elevation and offset

If you selected Delta elevation and Offset in the Element field:

1. In the Delta elevation and Offset fields, enter the values that define the element.

2. Enter a value in the Code field (this step is optional).

Tip - The annotation entered in the Code field is assigned to the end of the element and is displayed during stakeout.

3. Select the Apply superelevation and Apply widening check boxes as required.

Note - The Apply widening check box is only available after the the Apply superelevation check box has been selected.

Side slope

If you selected Side Slope in the Element field:

1. In the Cut slope (1), Fill slope (2), and Cut ditch width (3) fields, enter the values that define the element.

Note - Cut and fill slopes are expressed as positive values.

The following diagram shows the side slope.

2. Enter a value in the Code field (this step is optional).

Tip - The annotation entered in the Code field is assigned to the end of the element and is displayed during stakeout.

Station equations

Use Station equations to define the station values for an alignment.

To define an equation:

1. Select Station equations.

2. Tap New.

3. In the Back station field, enter a station value.

4. In the Ahead station field, enter a station value. The True station value will be calculated.

5. Tap Store.

The values entered in the Back station and Ahead station fields are shown: The zone is indicated by a number after the colon in each field. The calculated Progression, indicating whether the station value increases or decreases after the station equation, is also shown.

Note - The zone up to the first station equation is zone 1.

Tip - To change the progression for the last station equation, tap Edit.

6. To add further equations, tap New. To delete an equation, tap Delete. To accept the entered equations, tap Accept.

Group strings

To define a new group from a GENIO file:

1. Select a GENIO file from the list. Tap Edit.

2. Do one of the following:

♦

To define a new group, tap New.

♦

To edit an existing group, highlight the GENIO file name and then tap Edit.

3. Enter a group name and then tap OK.

4. Define the group.

To define the group:

1. From the graphics window, tap strings to select them. Alternatively, drag a box outline to select multiple strings. Selected master strings are shown as solid red circles. Selected sub strings are shown as solid blue circles. Tap a selected string to deselect it.

2. To clear your current selection or to undo your last selection, tap and hold in the graphics window and then select the appropriate option from the pop-up menu.

3. To select strings from a list of string names, tap and hold in the graphics window and then select List

selection from the pop-up menu. Tap the string names you want to select. Selected strings appear in the list with a check mark next to them. To clear your current selection, tap Clear.

4. Tap Accept.

Tip - Tap Rename to rename an existing group.

Notes

•

A group can include only one master string (6D). If the GENIO file does not include a 6D string but does include a 12D string, then the Trimble Survey Controller software will generate a 6D string with

• the same geometry as the 12D string and positions every 5 meters / feet.

Because the station values for 3D and 5D strings are defined relative to the selected 6D string, select

• strings for the group that obviously define a road.

Where available, Trimble recommends that you include the 12D string that is coincident with the selected master string in the group. 12D strings include the geometry for the vertical alignment that enables the Trimble Survey Controller software to correctly interpolate elevations between positions

• along the master string.

Unselected master and geometry strings appear as open red circles. Unselected sub strings (3D and

•

5D) appear as open dark gray circles.

Tap and hold on a string to browse the string name.

•

To define a new 3D string, tap and hold in the graphics view and then select New string

from the pop-up menu. This option is not available until you have selected a master (6D) string.

New string

Use this function to

define

a new string,

edit a string you have defined, or delete

a string.

Defining a new string

1. From the Group strings option, create a new group or edit an existing group.

2. Tap and hold in the graphics screen and then select New string from the pop-up menu.

3. Enter a string name.

4. Select the string that the new string will be derived from.

5. Select a string derivation method and then enter values that define the new string.

The following figure illustrates the Offset and calculated slope method where the Derived from string

(1), the Offset value (2) and the Calculated from string (3) define a new string (4) on the slope between the Derived from and Calculated from strings.

6. Tap Accept.

Notes

•

When you define a new group, you must select a master (6D) string before the New string menu option is available.

•

New string names must consist of four alphanumeric characters.

•

New strings are created as 3D strings.

•

You cannot define a new string relative to a 5D string.

•

New strings are colored teal.

Editing a new string

1. From the Group strings field, select Edit and then select the group containing the string to edit.

2. Tap and hold in the graphics screen and select Edit string from the pop-up menu.

3. Select the string to edit. You can only edit strings that have been defined using the

New string

functionality and that belong to the current group.

4. Edit the details as required.

5. Tap Accept.

Deleting a string

1. From the Group strings field select Edit and then select the group containing the string to delete.

2. Tap and hold in the graphics screen and then select Delete string from the pop-up menu.

3. Select the string to delete. You can only delete strings that have been defined using the

New

string function and that belong to the current group.

4. Tap OK.

Key in - Notes

You can enter a note in the Trimble Survey Controller database at any time. To do this:

1. To access the Key in note screen, do one of the following:

♦

From the main menu, select Key in / Notes.

♦

Tap Favorites / Key in note.

♦

On the controller keyboard, press CTRL + N.

2. Type in the details to be recorded. Alternatively tap T/Stamp to generate a record of the current time.

3. To store the note do one of the following:

♦

Tap Store to store the note in the database.

♦

Tap to attach the note to the previous observation.

♦

Tap to attach the note to the next observation to be stored.

Note - When you use , the note is only stored with the next observation if another observation is stored during the current survey. If the survey is ended without storing another observation the note is discarded.

4. To exit Key in notes, tap Esc. Alternatively, if the Note form is empty, tap Store.

In Review, tap Note to add a note to the current record.

In Point manager, scroll to the right and tap in the Note field to add a note to the point record.

Tunnel: Key in

Use this option to key in and edit a tunnel.

Note - The key in tunnel functionality is only available if you have the Trimble Survey Controller

Engineering option (PN 90100-02, 90100-03) enabled on your controller.

To key in a Tunnel:

1. From the main menu, select Key in / Tunnels.

2. Tap New and then enter a name for the tunnel definition.

To edit an existing tunnel, highlight the tunnel name and then tap Edit.

Tip - Use the Copy option to copy an existing tunnel definition with all its components into the current tunnel.

3. Choose a component to key in:

Horizontal Alignment

Vertical Alignment

Template Positioning

Templates

To review a keyed in tunnel tap the Review softkey. You can tap the icon at the bottom right corner of the screen to view the cross sections and then use the up and down arrows to view the cross section at other stations.

Notes

•

The Trimble Survey Controller software treats all tunnel distances, including stationing and offset values, as grid distances. The value in the Distances field (Files / Properties of current job - Cogo

•

settings), has no effect on the tunnel definition or the way tunnel distances are displayed.

If a ground coordinate system is defined in either the Trimble Geomatics or Trimble Survey

•

Controller software, then the grid coordinates are, in effect, also ground coordinates.

Keyed in tunnels are saved to the current project folder as 'tunnel name'.txl. Tunnels are available for all jobs in the current project folder.

To use a file saved to the current project folder in another project, use Windows Explorer to copy or move the file to the appropriate project folder.

Tunnel: Horizontal Alignment

To add a horizontal alignment to a tunnel definition, select Horizontal alignment. You can enter the alignment using one of the following methods:

♦

Length

♦

End station

♦

End coordinates

Tunnel: Entry by Length

To add a horizontal alignment to a tunnel definition by entering the lengths of the elements, select Horizontal

alignment and then do the following:

1. Tap New to enter the first element that defines the alignment. The Element field is set to Start point.

You cannot change this.

2. Enter the Start station.

3. In the Method field, choose one of the following options:

♦

Key in coordinates

♦

Select point

If you choose the Key in coordinates method, enter values in the Start north and Start east fields.

If you choose the Select point method field, enter a value in the Point name field. The Start north and

Start east fields will update with the values for the entered point.

Tip - To edit the Start north and Start east values when they have been derived from a point, change the method to Key in coordinates.

4. Enter the Station interval. To add the horizontal element, tap Store.

5. To enter the next horizontal element tap New. In the Entry Method field select Length, and then tap

Ok.

6. Select the Element method, enter the required information, and then tap Store.

7. To enter further elements, see the following:

8. When you have entered the last element, tap Accept.

9. Enter the other tunnel components, or tap Store to store the tunnel definition.

Tip - Tap Method to change the entry method to End station.

Line elements

If you select Line in the Element field, the Start station field displays the start station value for the line that you are defining. You cannot edit this.

In the Azimuth and Length fields, enter values that define the line. The End North and End East fields update to display the coordinates at the end of the element just added.

Tip - To reload the original azimuth select Restore tangency from the pop-up menu.

Arc elements

If you select Arc in the Element field, the Start station field displays the start station value for the arc that you are defining. You cannot edit this.

The following table shows the available methods and the fields that appear when you select each one.

Method

Radius and length

Delta angle and radius

Deflection angle and length

Procedure

Specify arc direction. In the Radius and Length fields, enter values that define the arc.

Specify arc direction. In the Angle and Radius fields, enter values that define the arc.

Specify arc direction. In the Angle and Length fields, enter values that define the arc.

The End North and End East fields update to display the coordinates at the end of the element just added.

The Azimuth field displays the azimuth as calculated from the previous element. To edit the azimuth, select

Edit azimuth from the pop-up menu in the Azimuth field. The software indicates that the element is non tangential by coloring the element icon red.

Tip - To reload the original azimuth select Restore tangency from the pop-up menu.

Entry spiral/Exit spiral elements

If you select Entry spiral/Exit spiral in the Element field, the Start station field displays the start station value for the entry spiral or exit spiral that you are defining. You cannot edit this.

Specify the arc direction. In the Start radius, End radius and Length fields, enter values that define the spiral.

The End North and End East fields update to display the coordinates at the end of the element just added.

The Azimuth field displays the azimuth as calculated from the previous element. To edit the azimuth, select

Edit azimuth from the pop-up menu in the Azimuth field. The software indicates that the element is non tangential by coloring the element icon red.

Tip - To reload the original azimuth select Restore tangency from the pop-up menu.

Note - Spirals are defined as Clothoids.

Tunnel: Entry by End station

To add a horizontal alignment to a tunnel definition by entering end station values, select Horizontal

alignment and then do the following:

1. Tap New to enter the first element that defines the alignment. The Element field is set to Start point.

You cannot change this.

2. Enter the Start station.

3. In the Method field, choose one of the following options:

♦

Key in coordinates

♦

Select point

If you choose the Key in coordinates method, enter values in the Start north and Start east fields.

If you choose the Select point method field, enter a value in the Point name field. The Start north and

Start east fields will update with the values for the entered point.

Tip - To edit the Start north and Start east values when they have been derived from a point, change the method to Key in coordinates.

4. Enter the Station interval. To add the horizontal element, tap Store.

5. To enter the next horizontal element, tap New. In the Entry Method field select End station and then tap Ok.

6. Select the Element method, enter the required information, and then tap Store.

7. To enter further elements, see the following:

8. When you have entered the last element, tap Accept.

9. Enter the other tunnel components, or tap Store to store the tunnel definition.

Tip - Tap Method to change the entry method to Length.

Line elements

If you select Line in the Element field , the Start station field displays the start station value for the line that you are defining. You cannot edit this.

In the Azimuth and End station fields, enter values that define the line. The End North and End East fields update to display the coordinates at the end of the element just added.

Tip - To reload the original azimuth select Restore tangency from the pop-up menu.

Arc elements

If you select Arc in the Element field, the Start station field displays the start station value for the arc that you are defining. You cannot edit this.

The following table shows the available methods and the fields that appear when you select each one.

Method

Radius and end station

Deflection angle and end station

Procedure

Specify arc direction. In the Radius and End station fields, enter values that define the arc.

Specify arc direction. In the Angle and End station fields, enter values that define the arc.

The End North and End East fields update to display the coordinates at the end of the element just added.

The Azimuth field displays the azimuth as calculated from the previous element. To edit the azimuth, select

Edit azimuth from the pop-up menu in the Azimuth field. The software indicates that the element is non tangential by coloring the element icon red.

Tip - To reload the original azimuth select Restore tangency from the pop-up menu.

Entry spiral/Exit spiral elements

If you select Entry spiral/Exit spiral in the Element field, the Start station field displays the start station value for the entry spiral or exit spiral that you are defining. You cannot edit this.

Specify arc direction. In the Start radius, End radius and End station fields, enter values that define the spiral.

The End North and End East fields update to display the coordinates at the end of the element just added.

The Azimuth field displays the azimuth as calculated from the previous element. To edit the azimuth, select

Edit azimuth from the pop-up menu in the Azimuth field. The software indicates that the element is non tangential by coloring the element icon red.

Tip - To reload the original azimuth select Restore tangency from the pop-up menu.

Note - Spirals are defined as Clothoids.

Tunnel: Entry by End coordinates

To add a horizontal alignment to a tunnel definition by entering end coordinates or points, select Horizontal

alignment and then do the following:

1. Tap New to enter the first element that defines the alignment. The Element field is set to Start point.

You cannot change this.

2. Enter the Start station.

3. In the Method field, choose one of the following options:

♦

Key in coordinates

♦

Select point

If you choose the Key in coordinates method, enter values in the Start north and Start east fields.

If you choose the Select point method field, enter a value in the Point name field. The Start north and

Start east fields will update with the values for the entered point.

Tip - To edit the Start north and Start east values when they have been derived from a point, change the method to Key in coordinates.

4. Enter the Station interval. To add the horizontal element, tap Store.

5. To enter the next horizontal element tap New. In the Entry method field select End coordinates and then tap Ok.

6. Select the Element method, enter the required information, and then tap Store.

7. To enter further elements, see the following:

8. When you have entered the last element, tap Accept.

9. Enter the other tunnel components, or tap Store to store the tunnel definition.

Line elements

If you select Line in the Element field , the Start station field displays the start station value for the line that you are defining. You cannot edit this.

In the Method field, choose one of the following options:

•

End coordinates

•

Select end point

If you choose the End coordinates method, enter values in the End north and End east fields. The Azimuth and

Length fields will update with the values for the entered coordinates.

If you choose the Select end point method field , enter a value in the Point name field. The Azimuth and

Length fields and the End north and End east fields will update with the values for the entered point.

Tip - To edit the End north and End east values when they have been derived from a point, change the method to End coordinates.

Arc elements

If you select Arc in the Element field, the Start station field displays the start station value for the arc that you are defining. You cannot edit this.

In the Method field, choose one of the following options:

•

End coordinates

•

Select end point

If you choose the End coordinates method, enter values in the End north and End east fields.The Azimuth, Arc

direction, Radius and Length fields will update will update with the values for the entered coordinates.

If you choose the Select end point method field , enter a value in the Point name field. The Azimuth, Arc

direction, Radius and Length fields and the End north and End east fields will update with the values for the entered point.

Tip - To edit the End north and End east values when they have been derived from a point, change the method to End coordinates.

Tunnel: Vertical Alignment

To add a vertical alignment to a tunnel definition, select Vertical alignment. You can enter the alignment using one of the following methods:

•

Vertical Points of Intersection

•

Start and end points

Note - The selected entry method applies to all elements defining the vertical alignment.

Tunnel: Entry by Vertical Points of Intersection (VPI)

To add a vertical alignment to a tunnel definition by entering Vertical Points of Intersection (VPI), select

Vertical alignment and then do the following:

1. To enter the first element that defines the alignment, tap New.

2. In the Station and Elevation fields, key in the values that define the first vertical point of intersection.

The Element field is set to Start point. You cannot change this.

3. Tap Store to add the vertical element record.

4. Tap New. In the entry method field select VPI and then tap Ok.

5. Select the Element method, enter the required information, and then tap Store.

6. To enter further elements, see the following:

Asymmetric parabola elements

7. When you have entered the last element, tap Accept.

8. Enter the other tunnel components, or tap Store to store the tunnel definition.

Point elements

Note - A vertical alignment defined by VPIs must end with a point.

Circular arc elements

If you select Circular arc in the Element field, use the Station and Elevation fields to key in values that define the VPI. Enter the radius of the circular arc in the Radius field. The Slope in field updates to display the calculated slope value. The Length, K factor and Slope out fields update when the next element is added.

Symmetric parabola elements

If you select Sym parabola in the Element field, use the Station and Elevation fields to key in values

that define the VPI and a length for the parabola. The Slope in field updates to display the calculated slope value. The K factor and Slope out fields update when the next element is added.

Asymmetric parabola elements

Note - When you edit an element, only the selected element is updated. All adjoining elements remain unchanged.

Tip - To confirm the entry, use the Slope in, Slope out, and K factor values.

Tunnel: Entry by Start and End Points

To add a vertical alignment to a tunnel definition by entering Start and end points, select Vertical alignment and then do the following:

1. To enter the first element that defines the alignment, tap New.

2. In the Station and Elevation fields, key in the values that define the first vertical point of intersection.

The Element field is set to Start point. You cannot change this.

3. Tap Store to add the vertical element record.

4. Tap New. In the entry method field select Start and End points and then tap Ok.

5. Select the Element, enter the required information and then tap Store. For details on supported elements, see the following:

6. When you have entered the last element, tap Accept.

7. Enter the other tunnel components, or tap Store to store the tunnel definition.

Point elements

field updates when the next element is added.

Circular arc elements

If you select Circular arc in the Element field, use the Start station, Start elevation, End station, End

elevation, and Radius fields to key in values that define the circular arc. The Length, Slope in, and

Slope out fields update to display the calculated values.

Symmetric parabola elements

If you select Sym parabola in the Element field, use the Start station, Start elevation, End station, End

elevation, and K factor fields to key in values that define the parabola. The Length, Slope in, and

Slope out fields update to display the calculated values.

Note - When you edit an element, only the selected element is updated. All adjoining elements remain unchanged.

Tip - To confirm the entry, use the Slope in, Slope out, and Length values.

Tunnel: Template Positioning

To define the position of templates in a tunnel definition, specify the station at which the Trimble Survey

Controller software starts to apply each template. A template is applied at the start station, and template element values are then interpolated linearly (applied on a pro rata basis) from that point to the station where the next template is applied.

Note - For interpolation to take place between templates they must have the same number of elements.

To define the template positioning:

1. Select Template positioning.

2. Tap New.

3. In the Start station field, specify the start station for the template(s).

4. Select the template to apply.

6. Tap Store to apply the template.

7. Tap New to enter more templates at other positions.

8. When all template positions are entered tap Accept.

Tip - To delete a highlighted entry, tap Delete.

9. Enter the other tunnel components, or tap Store to store the tunnel definition.

Note - Tap the Options softkey to specify if the templates are applied Vertical or Perpendicular to the vertical alignment. See the following diagram where the red linework indicates the template applied perpendicular and the blue linework a template applied vertically.

Tunnel: Templates

To define a template for a tunnel definition, select Templates and then do the following:

1. Tap New, enter a template name and then tap OK.

Tip - Use the Copy option to copy an existing template defintion into the current template.

2. To edit an existing template highlight the template name and tap Edit. Then, from the graphical template view select the element and then tap Edit.

3. Tap New to enter the start point element defining the template.

4. In the Horizontal offset and Vertical offset fields, enter the values that define the Start point and then tap Store. The element appears in the graphical view.

5. To enter further elements, tap New, select the Element and Method and then enter the required information. For details on supported elements and entry methods, see the following:

Turned angle and distance

6. When you have entered the last element, tap Accept.

Tip - To delete an element, highlight it and tap Delete. When you add an element, it is added after the last element that you added. To insert it at a particular place, highlight the element in the graphical view that you want it to follow. Tap New and then enter details for the element.

Note - Templates can be open or closed.

7. Enter the other tunnel components, or tap Store to store the tunnel definition.

Tip - To rename a template, highlight it and then tap Rename. To delete a template, highlight it and then tap Delete.

Line elements

To add a line to the template definition, select Line in the Element field.

The following table shows the available methods and the fields that appear when you select each one.

100

Method

Cross fall and offset

Delta elevation and offset

End point

Procedure

In the Cross fall and Offset fields, enter values that define the line. To change the way a cross fall value is expressed, tap Options and then change the Grade field as required.

In the Delta elevation and Offset fields, enter values that define the line.

In the Horizontal offset and Vertical offset fields, enter values that define the end point of the line.

For all methods, you can specify a Code.

Arc elements

To add an arc to the template definition, select Arc in the Element field.

The following table shows the available methods and the fields that appear when you select each one.

Method

End point and

Radius

Procedure

In the Horizontal offset and Vertical offset fields, enter values that define the end point of the arc. Enter the Radius. Select Large arc, if required.

Alignment and Delta angle

Specify the Delta angle for the arc. The center point for the arc is defined by the horizontal and vertical alignments.

Center point and delta angle

In the Horizontal offset and Vertical offset fields, enter values that define the center point of the arc. Enter the Delta angle for the arc.

Tip - On page two the parameters defining the arc are displayed.

For all methods, you can specify a Code.

101

Cogo

Cogo Menu

For some calculations, you must define a projection, or select a Scale factor-only coordinate system.

You can display ellipsoid, grid, or ground distances by changing the Distances field in the

Cogo settings

screen.

To perform Cogo calculations in a No projection / No datum coordinate system, set the Distances field to

Grid. The Trimble Survey Controller software then performs standard Cartesian computations. If the grid distances you enter are distances on the ground, the new computed grid coordinates will be ground coordinates.

Note - When the Distances field is set to Ground or Ellipsoid, the Trimble Survey Controller software attempts to perform calculations on the ellipsoid. Because there is no relationship established at this point, the system cannot compute coordinates.

For more information, see:

102

Cogo - Compute Inverse

To calculate the azimuth, horizontal, vertical, and slope distances between two existing points:

1. From the map, select the From point (1) and To point (2), as shown in the diagram below.

2. Tap and hold on the map and select Compute inverse from the shortcut menu. Alternatively, select

Cogo / Compute inverse from the main menu.

3. The azimuth (3), horizontal distance (4), change in elevation, slope distance and grade are shown.

Cogo - Compute Point

Use this Cogo function to calculate the coordinates of an intersection point from 1 or 2 existing points. You can store the results in the database.

Use Options to specify ground, grid, or sea level distances.

Note - When entering an existing point name you can select from the list, perform a fast fix or measure a point. Fast fix stores an automatic rapid point with a temporary point name.

Warning - In general, do not compute points and then change the coordinate system or perform a calibration.

If you do, these points will be inconsistent with the new coordinate system. An exception to this is points computed using the Brng-dist from a point method.

Note - If you use the Four point intersection method or the From a baseline method and then change the antenna height record for one of the source points, the coordinates of the point will not be updated.

Note - If the measured points were measured using GPS, the coordinates of the point can only be displayed as grid values if a projection and a datum transformation are defined.

Note - For all methods when the point is stored use the Store as field to specify if the calculated point is to be stored as WGS84, Local or Grid coordinates values.

Note - You can compute an azimuth from two points in the database directly in an azimuth field. To do this, enter the point names in the Azimuth field, separated by a hyphen. For example, to compute the azimuth from point 2 to point 3, enter "2-3". This method works with most alphanumeric point names, but it does not support point names that already contain a hyphen.

103

Calculate coordinates using one of the following methods:

Brng-dist from a point

Brng-dist intersect

Brng-brng intersect

Dist-dist intersect

Four point intersection

From a baseline

Vertical plane and angle

Brng-dist from a point

To calculate the coordinates of an intersection using the Brng-dist from a point method:

1. From the main menu, select Cogo / Compute point.

2. Enter a Point name.

3. In the Method field, select Bearing and distance.

4. In the Start point field, use the advanced pop-up arrow ( ) to select either a Radial or Sequential measurement method. When Sequential is selected the Start point field is automatically updated to the last stored intersection point (see diagrams below).

5. Set the Azimuth origin to either Grid 0°, True, Magnetic, or Sun (GPS only).

6. As shown in the diagrams below, enter the name of the Start point (1), the azimuth (2) and the horizontal distance (3).

7. Tap Calc to calculate the intersection point (4).

8. Store the point in the database.

104

To compute the misclosure of a loop of points:

1. Give the last point the same name as the first start point.

2. Tap Calc for the point coordinates.

When you tap Store, the loop misclosure appears on the screen. Store the last point as a check to avoid overwriting the first point.

Turned angle and distance

To calculate the coordinates of an intersection using the turned angle and distance method:

1. From the main menu, select Cogo / Compute point.

2. Enter a Point name.

3. In the Method field, select Turned angle and distance.

4. In the Start point field, tap the advanced pop-up arrow ( ), then select either a Radial or

Sequential measurement method. When Sequential is selected, the Start point name automatically updates to the last stored intersection point (see diagrams below).

5. In the End point field, tap the advanced pop-up arrow ( ), then select either an Azimuth or End

point to define a reference orientation.

When using the sequential method, the reference orientation for new points moving forward is the computed reverse azimuth from the previous turned angle.

6. As shown in the diagrams below, enter the name of the Start point (1), the azimuth (2) and the horizontal distance (3).

7. Tap Calc to calculate the intersection point (4).

8. Store the point in the database.

105

Brng-dist intersect

To calculate the coordinates of an intersection using the Brng-dist intersect method:

1. From the main menu, select Cogo / Compute point.

2. Enter a Point name.

3. In the Method field, select Brng-dist intersection.

4. As shown in the diagram below, enter the name of Point 1 (1), the azimuth (2), the name of Point 2

(3) and the horizontal distance (4).

5. Tap Calc.

6. There are two solutions (5,6) for this calculation; tap Other to see the second solution.

7. Store the point in the database.

Brng-brng intersect

To calculate the coordinates of an intersection using the Brng-brng intersect method:

1. From the main menu, select Cogo / Compute point.

2. Enter a Point name.

3. In the Method field, select Brng-brng intersect.

4. As shown in the diagram below, enter the name of Point 1 (1), the azimuth from point one (2), the name of Point 2 (3), and the azimuth from point two (4).

5. Tap Calc to calculate the intersection point (5).

106

6. Store the point in the database

Dist-dist intersect

To calculate the coordinates of an intersection using the Dist-dist intersect method:

1. From the main menu, select Cogo / Compute point.

2. Enter a Point name.

3. In the Method field, select Dist-dist intersect.

4. As shown in the diagram below, enter the name of Point 1 (1), the horizontal distance (2), the name of

Point 2 (3) and the horizontal distance (4).

5. Tap Calc.

6. There are two solutions (5,6) for this calculation; tap Other to see the second solution.

7. Store the point in the database.

To record an offset using the Four point intersection method:

1. From the main menu, select Cogo / Compute point.

2. Enter a Point name.

3. In the Method field, select Four point intersection.

4. As shown in the diagram below, enter the names of the start point of line 1 (1), the end point of line 1

(2), the start point of line 2 (3) and the end point of line 2 (4).

5. Enter any change in the vertical position as a vertical distance from the end of line 2.

6. To calculate the offset point (5), tap Calc.

107

Note - The two lines do not have to intersect, but they must converge at some point, as shown below.

To record an offset using the From a baseline method:

1. From the main menu, select Cogo / Compute point.

2. Enter a Point name.

3. In the Method field, select From a baseline.

4. As shown in the diagram below, enter the names of the start point (1) and the end point (2) of the baseline.

5. Enter a Distance and select the Distance direction method (5, 6, 7, or 8).

6. Enter the offset distance and select the Offset direction (3 or 4).

7. Enter the vertical distance from the end of the line.

Note - Enter a positive offset if the point is offset to the right (4) of the end point, or a negative offset if it is to the left (3). Enter 0 for either the distance or the offset if you do not want the point offset in that direction.

8. To calculate the offset point (9), tap Calc.

To calculate the coordinates of a point using the Vertical plane and angle method:

1. From the main menu, select Cogo / Compute point.

2. Enter a Point name.

3. In the Method field, select Vertical plane and angle.

4. As shown in the diagram below, enter the names of the points (1) and (2) that define the vertical plane, for example, the side of a building. Name and measure new points, or enter the names of existing points.

108

5. Tap Meas HA VA to measure the angle from the instrument (3) to the required point (4).

The intersection of the vertical plane and the measured angle is used to calculate coordinates for the required point.

6. Tap Store to store the point in the database.

Cogo - Compute Area

To calculate an area enclosed by points in the database:

1. From the map, select the points on the perimeter of the area to be calculated. Use the order that they occur on the perimeter.

2. Tap and hold on the map and select Compute area from the shortcut menu.

Alternatively, select Cogo / Compute area from the main menu.

Note - The computed area varies according to the

Distance display setting.

The diagram below shows the calculated area (1) and perimeter (2).

Cogo - Compute Azimuth

You can use keyed-in data, and points stored in the database, to calculate an azimuth by various methods.

You can also store the results in the database. For some methods, you have to tap Calc to display the results.

The data that you enter can have different units. For example, you can add an angle in degrees to an angle in radians-the answer is returned in whatever format you specified in the job configuration.

Calculate an azimuth using one of the following methods:

109

Azimuth to line offset

Between two points

To calculate the azimuth between two points:

1. From the main menu, select Cogo / Compute azimuth.

2. In the Method field, select Between two points.

3. As shown in the diagram below, enter the name of the From point (1) and the To point (2).

4. The azimuth between them (3) is calculated.

Bisected azimuths

To calculate bisected azimuths:

1. From the main menu, select Cogo / Compute azimuth.

2. In the Method field, select Bisected azimuths.

3. As shown in the diagram below, enter values for Azimuth 1 (1), and Azimuth 2 (2).

4. The azimuth halfway between them (3), is calculated.

110

Bisected corner

To calculate a bisected corner azimuth:

1. From the main menu, select Cogo / Compute azimuth.

2. In the Method field, select Bisected corner.

3. As shown in the diagram below, enter the names of the Side point 1 (1), the Corner point (2), and Side

point 2 (3).

4. The azimuth (4), halfway between Side point 1 and Side point 2, from the Corner point, is calculated.

Azimuth plus angle

To calculate the azimuth plus angle:

1. From the main menu, select Cogo / Compute azimuth.

2. In the Method field, select Azimuth plus angle.

3. As shown in the diagram below, enter the Azimuth (1) and the Turned angle (2).

4. The sum of the two (3) is calculated.

Azimuth to line offset

To calculate the azimuth to line offset:

111

1. From the main menu, select Cogo / Compute azimuth.

2. In the Method field, select Azimuth to line offset.

3. As shown in the diagram below, enter the name of the line (1), the stationing (2) and the horizontal offset (3).

Tip - If the line does not already exist, tap the advanced pop-up arrow and then select Two points.

You can then enter the start point and end point to define the line.

4. The azimuth (4), from the start point of the line to the offset point is calculated.

Cogo - Compute Distance

You can use keyed-in data, and points stored in the database, to calculate a distance by various methods. You can also store the results in the database.

The data that you enter can have different units. For example, if you add a distance in meters to a distance in feet, the answer is returned in whatever format you specified in the job configuration.

For some methods you have to tap Calc to display the results.

Between two points

Between point and line

Between point and arc

Between two points

To compute the distance between two points:

1. From the main menu, select Cogo / Compute distance.

2. In the Method field, select Between two points.

3. Enter the From point and the To point.

4. The distance between the two points is calculated.

Between point and line

112

To compute the distance between a point and a line:

1. From the main menu, select Cogo / Compute distance.

2. In the Method field, select Between point and line.

3. As shown in the diagram below, enter the Point name (1) and the Line name (2).

Tip - If the line does not already exist, tap the advanced pop-up arrow and select Two points. You can then enter the start point and end point to define the line.

4. The distance along the line (3) and the perpendicular distance (4) to the line is calculated. The distance along the line is from the point specified (5).

Between point and arc

To compute the distance between a point and an arc:

1. From the main menu, select Cogo / Compute distance.

2. In the Method field, select Between point and arc.

3. As shown in the diagram below, enter the Point name (1) and the Arc name (2).

4. The distance along the arc (3) and the perpendicular distance (4) to the arc is calculated. The distance along the arc is from the point specified (5).

Cogo - Compute Average

Use the Compute average option to compute and store the average position for a point that has been measured more than once.

Enter the name of the point to compute the average position for into the Point name field. You can select the point name from a list using the

pop-up menu for the field.

113

If the point you entered has only one position fix, or has been stored as a control point, then an error message appears to tell you that an average position cannot be computed.

Once you enter a point name for which an average position can be computed, Trimble Survey Controller searches the database to find all the positions for that point. Once computed, the average point grid position appears, along with the standard deviations for each ordinate.

Note - Any Mean Turned Angle (MTA) observed to the point is ignored and the original observations are used to compute the average position.

If there are more than two positions for the point, a Details softkey appears. Tap Details to view the residuals from the average position to each individual position. You can use this residuals form to include or exclude specific positions from the average computation.

Tip - Trimble Survey Controller averages all positions in the current job database with the same name

(except Control points). Tap Details to ensure that only the required positions are averaged.

To store the computed average position for the point, tap Store. If an averaged position for the point already exists in the database, the existing point is automatically deleted when the new average position is stored.

The averaged position is stored as a grid position. An averaged position is not automatically updated if the positions used to compute the average are changed, for example, if the calibration is updated, if observations are transformed or deleted, or if new observations of the same name are added. If this occurs, you should re-compute the averaged position.

Cogo - Subdivide a line

Use this function to subdivide a line into segments. The points created are automatically stored in the database and the point names are automatically incremented from the Start point name.

You can predefine the code of a subdivided point. For more information, see

Subdivide Pts Code.

Subdivide a line using one of the following methods:

Fixed segment length

Fixed number of segments

Tip - If the line does not already exist, tap the advanced pop-up arrow and then select Two points. You can then enter the start point and end point to define the line.

Fixed segment length

To subdivide a line into segments of fixed length:

114

1. Do one of the following:

♦

From the map, select the line to be subdivided (1). Tap and hold on the screen and then select

♦ the Subdivide a line option from the shortcut menu.

From the main menu, select Cogo / Subdivide a line. Enter the name of the defined line.

2. In the Method field, select Fixed segment length.

3. Enter the segment length (2), and any horizontal offset (3) and vertical offset from the line.

4. Enter the names of the Start at station (4), the End at station (5), and the Start point name.

5. Tap Start to calculate the new points (4, 6, 7, or 8, 9, 10).

Fixed number of segments

To subdivide a line into a fixed number of segments:

1. Do one of the following:

♦

From the map, select the line to be subdivided. Tap and hold on the screen and then select the

♦

Subdivide a line option from the shortcut menu.

From the main menu, select Cogo / Subdivide a line. Enter the name of the defined line.

1. In the Method field, select Fixed number of segments.

2. Enter the number of segments, and any horizontal offset (2) and vertical offset from the line.

3. Enter the names of the Start at station (3), the End at station (4), and the Start point name.

4. Tap Start to calculate the new points (3, 5, 4, or 6, 7, 8).

Cogo - Subdivide an arc

Use this function to subdivide an arc using one of the following methods:

Fixed segment length

115

Fixed number of segments

Fixed chord length

Fixed angle subtended

The points created are automatically stored in the database and the point names are incremented from the Start point name.

You can predefine the code of a subdivided point. For more information, see

Subdivide Pts Code.

Fixed segment length

To subdivide an arc into segments of fixed length:

1. Do one of the following:

♦

From the map, select the arc to be subdivided. Tap and hold on the screen and select the

♦

Subdivide an arc option from the shortcut menu.

From the main menu, select Cogo / Subdivide an arc . Enter the name of the defined arc.

2. In the Method field, select Fixed number of segments.

3. Enter the segment length (2), and any horizontal offset (3) and vertical offset from the arc.

4. Enter the names of the Start at station (4), the End at station (5), and the Start point name.

5. Tap Start to calculate the new points (4, 6, 7, or 8, 9, 10).

Fixed number of segments

To subdivide an arc into a fixed number of segments:

1. Do one of the following:

♦

From the map, select the arc to be subdivided. Tap and hold on the screen and select the

♦

Subdivide an arc option from the shortcut menu.

From the main menu, select Cogo / Subdivide an arc . Enter the name of the defined arc.

2. In the Method field, select Fixed number of segments.

3. Enter the number of segments, and any horizontal offset (2) and vertical offset from the arc.

4. Enter the names of the Start at station (3), the End at station (4), and the Start point name.

5. Tap Start to calculate the new points (3, 5, 4, or 6, 7, 8).

116

Fixed chord length

To subdivide an arc into segments of fixed chord length:

1. Do one of the following:

♦

From the map, select the arc to be subdivided. Tap and hold on the screen and select the

♦

Subdivide an arc option from the shortcut menu.

From the main menu, select Cogo / Subdivide an arc . Enter the name of the defined arc.

2. In the Method field, select Fixed chord length.

3. Enter the chord length (2), and any horizontal offset (3) and vertical offset from the arc.

4. Enter the names of the Start at station (4), the End at station (5), and the Start point name.

5. Tap Start to calculate the new points (4, 6, 7, or 8, 9, 10).

Fixed angle subtended

To subdivide an arc into fixed angle subtended segments:

1. Do one of the following:

♦

From the map, select the arc to be subdivided. Tap and hold on the screen and select the

♦

Subdivide an arc option from the shortcut menu.

From the main menu, select Cogo / Subdivide an arc. Enter the name of the defined arc.

2. In the Method field, select Fixed angle subtended.

3. Enter the Angle subtended (2), and any horizontal offset (3) and vertical offset from the arc.

4. Enter the names of the Start at station (4), the End at station (5), and the Start point name.

5. Tap Start to calculate the new points (4, 6, 7, or 8, 9, 10).

117

Taped distances

Use this function to add points to your Trimble Survey Controller job. Use a graphical right angle and distance interface to define rectangular structures, such as a building or building foundations. Key in or measure two points to define the first side, orientation, and location of the object.

Tip - To select the elevation from the Start point or End point, use the pop-up menu in the Elevation field.

To select the direction for your next point graphically on the plan view, tap the screen or use the right and left arrow keys. The dashed red line shows the current direction for the next side. To create the next side, tap Add, and then enter the distance to the next point using the angle defined in the plan view.

Alternatively, select a point that already exists in your job and the software will calculate the distance to that point for you.

To measure a point using GPS or Conventional, select Fastfix or Measure from the pop-up menu on the Point

name field.

Tip - If your style is configured for a laser rangefinder, Laser is available in the pop-up menu for Length and

H. Dist fields. Tap Laser to measure distances using the laser.

To close the object back onto the start point, tap Close. A horizontal distance will be computed and displayed.

Use this as a check against your plan or your taped distance. To complete the function, tap Store. To add further sides to the object, tap Add.

Tip - If you need more detailed information on the quality of the close, use a different point name for the end point, and store the object. Then compute an inverse between the start point and the end point.

To change a keyed in distance before the feature is stored, tap Edit, and then select the end point of the side to edit. When you adjust the distance, the plan view updates. You can then continue to add more sides.

Notes

•

Once the feature has been stored, you can no longer edit the lengths of the sides.

•

The orientation is defined by the first side. Only parallel or 90° angles can be added from this side. To

• use a different angle, store the object, and then create a new side.

Because new points are stored as polars, taped distances will not work without a Scale factor only or

• fully defined Projection in the coordinate system.

In addition to the new points that are created, lines are created automatically and stored to the Trimble

Survey Controller database. These are visible in the map and can be used to stake out lines.

118

Cogo - Transformations

Use this Cogo function to transform a single point, or a selection of points, using one or a combination of

Rotation, Scale, and Translations. When performing more than one translation, the order is always Rotation,

Scale, then Translation.

Rotate

To rotate a selection of points about a specified origin point:

1. From the main menu, select Cogo / Transformations.

2. Set the Rotate check box, then tap Next.

3. Enter an Origin point.

4. Enter a Rotation.

5. Tap Next and then select the point(s) to rotate.

6. To store the transformed point(s) to the database, tap Accept.

A transformation deletes the original point(s) and stores new grid points of the same name.

Scale

To scale the distances between the origin point and the selected points:

1. From the main menu, select Cogo / Transformations.

2. Set the Scale check box, then tap Next.

3. Enter an Origin point.

4. Enter a Scale factor.

5. Tap Next, then select the point(s) to scale.

6. To store the transformed point(s) to the database, tap Accept.

A transformation deletes the original point(s) and stores new grid points of the same name.

Translate

To move a selection of points on a grid surface:

1. From the main menu, select Cogo / Transformations.

2. Set the Translate check box, then tap Next.

3. In the Method field, select either Deltas or Two points.

If you choose Deltas:

1. Enter a delta Northing, Easting, and/or Elevation. You can select a single delta, for example a

Northing, or any combination of deltas for the transformation.

If you choose Two points:

1. Select a From point.

119

2. Select a To point.

4. Tap Next, then select the point(s) to transform.

5. To store the transformed point(s) to the database, tap Accept.

A transformation deletes the original point(s) and stores new grid points of the same name.

Notes

•

Only points that can be displayed as grid coordinates can be transformed.

•

When transforming by both rotate and scale, the origin for the scale defaults to the origin for the

• rotate. You can change this.

When entering a point name, you can select from the list, key in a point, perform a fast fix, measure a point, or make a map selection. Fast fix stores an automatic rapid point with a temporary point name.

Warning - If you select a base point to be transformed, then vectors flowing from this base become null.

Cogo - Traverse

Use this function to calculate a traverse misclosure, and adjust a conventional traverse. The software helps you select the points to be used, calculates the misclosure, and then lets you compute either a Compass or

Transit adjustment.

Note - The Compass adjustment is sometimes known as the Bowditch adjustment.

You can calculate closed-loop traverses and closed traverses that start and end on pairs of known points.

To calculate a traverse:

1. Enter the Traverse name.

2. In the Start station field, tap List.

3. Select a point from the list of valid traverse points that can be used as the start station. Tap Enter.

A valid start station has one or more backsights and one or more observations to the next traverse station.

4. Tap Add to add the next point in the traverse.

5. Select the next station in the traverse.

A valid traverse station has one or more backsight observations to the previous traverse station, and one or more observations to the next traverse station. When there is only one valid traverse station, it is added automatically.

Note - To view the observed azimuth and distance between two points in the list, highlight the first point and tap the Info softkey.

6. Repeat steps 4 and 5 until all points in the traverse have been added.

120

A valid end station has one or more backsights, and one or more observations to the previous traverse station.

If you need to remove any points from the list, highlight the point and tap Delete. When you delete a point, all points after it are deleted as well.

7. Tap Close to compute the traverse misclosure.

Note - You cannot add more points after selecting a control point, or a station with more than one backsight.

Note - To compute a traverse closure, there must be at least one distance measurement between successive points in the traverse list.

Note - The Azimuth fields do not have to be completed.

If the backsight azimuth is null:

♦ the traverse cannot be oriented.

♦ adjusted coordinates cannot be stored.

♦ an angular adjustment cannot be computed on an open traverse. (A distance adjustment can be computed.)

If the foresight azimuth is null in a loop traverse, and if all angles have been observed, you can compute an angular and distance adjustment.

The backsight and foresight points that provide the orientation for the traverse are shown.

If necessary, tap Enter to edit the fields as follows:

1. Inspect the results of the traverse and do one of the following:

♦

To store the closure results, tap Store.

♦

To adjust the traverse, go to the next step.

2. Tap Options to check the traverse settings. Make any changes as required, then tap Enter.

3. Tap Adj. Ang. to adjust the angular misclosure. The angular misclosure is distributed according to the setting in the Options screen.

4. Inspect the results of the traverse, then do one of the following:

♦

To store the angular adjustment details, tap Store.

♦

To adjust the distance misclosure, tap Adj. dist. The distance misclosure is distributed according to the setting in the Options screen and the traverse is stored.

When the traverse is stored, each point used in the traverse is stored as an adjusted traverse point with a search classification of adjusted. If there are any previously adjusted traverse points of the same name, they are deleted.

121

Pop-Up Menu Controls

To insert a feature name into a field, enter the name or tap the pop-up menu button and select one of the following options from the list that appears:

List

Key in

Measure

Fast fix select features from the database key in details measure a point automatically measure a construction class point

Map selections select from a list of the features currently selected in the map

Calculator shortcut to the Calculator

Units select units for the field

To change the method of data entry, tap the advanced pop-up menu button . The first two or three fields change.

Cogo Settings

Use this screen to configure the distance type (grid, ground, or ellipsoid), and the grid coordinate system orientation to be used by the Trimble Survey Controller software.

You can select a south azimuth, or set the grid coordinates to increase in north-east, south-west, north-west, or south-east directions.

For a GPS survey, specify an ellipsoid (in Datum transformation) if ground distances are to be displayed, otherwise the WGS-84 ellipsoid is used.

When you select Scale factor only in a conventional instrument only survey, grid and ground distances can be displayed.

To configure the Cogo settings, select File / New job / Cogo settings when creating a new job. For an existing job select File / Properties of current job / Cogo settings.

Distance Display

The Distances field defines how distances are displayed and which distances are used for calculations in the

Trimble Survey Controller software. Select one of the following options:

•

Ground (the default setting)

•

Ellipsoid

•

Grid

The following diagram shows the options between points A and B.

122

Ground distance

A ground distance is the horizontal distance calculated between the two points at the mean elevation parallel to the chosen ellipsoid.

If an ellipsoid has been defined in the job and the Distances field is set to Ground, the distance is calculated parallel to that. If no ellipsoid has been defined, the WGS84 ellipsoid is used.

Ellipsoid distance

If the Distances field is set to Ellipsoid then a correction is applied and all distances are calculated as if on the local ellipsoid, which usually approximates to sea level. If no ellipsoid has been specified, the WGS84 ellipsoid is used.

Note - If the coordinate system for a job is defined as Scale factor only, ellipsoid distances cannot be displayed.

Grid distance

If the Distances field is set to Grid, the grid distance between two points is displayed. This is the simple trigonometrical distance between the two sets of two-dimensional coordinates. If the coordinate system for the job is defined as Scale factor only, and the Distances field is set to Grid, the Trimble Survey Controller software displays ground distances multiplied by the scale factor.

Note - A grid distance between two measured GPS points cannot be displayed unless you have specified a datum transformation and a projection, or performed a site calibration.

Curvature Correction

In the Trimble Survey Controller system, all ellipsoid and ground distances are parallel to the ellipsoid.

Azimuth Display

The azimuth displayed and used by the Trimble Survey Controller software depends on the coordinate system

123

that you defined for the current job:

•

If you defined both a datum transformation and a projection, or if you selected Scale factor only , the

• grid azimuth is displayed.

If you defined no datum transformation and/or no projection, the best available azimuth is displayed.

•

A grid azimuth is the first choice, then a local ellipsoidal azimuth, then the WGS84 ellipsoid azimuth.

If you are using a laser rangefinder, the magnetic azimuth is displayed.

If a south azimuth display is required, set the South azimuth field to Yes. All azimuths still increase clockwise. The following diagram shows the effect of setting the South azimuth fields to No or Yes.

Grid Coordinates

Use the Grid coords field to set the grid coordinates to increase in one of the following sets of directions:

• north and east

• south and west

• north and west

• south and east

The following diagram shows the effect of each setting.

124

Magnetic Declination

Set the magnetic declination for the local area if magnetic bearings are being used in the Trimble Survey

Controller software. You can use magnetic bearings if you choose the Cogo / Compute point using the

Brng-dist from a point method.

The magnetic declination defines the relationship between magnetic north and grid north for the job. Enter a negative value if magnetic north is west of grid north. Enter a positive value if magnetic north is east of grid north. For example, if the compass needle points 7° to the east of grid north, the declination is +7° or 7°E.

Note - Use the published declination values if available.

Note - If grid north in the job has been rotated away from true north due to the coordinate system definition

(possibly via a GPS calibration) then this must be allowed for in the magnetic declination specified.

Neighborhood adjustment

125

You can apply a Neighborhood adjustment to all conventional foresight observations made from a Station setup plus or Resection, and to all GPS observations made in a job that has a valid GPS site calibration. To apply Neighborhood adjustment, select the check box in Properties of current job / Cogo settings.

Neighborhood adjustment uses the residuals from Station setup plus, Resection or GPS site calibration to calculate delta grid values to apply to subsequent observations made during the survey. Each observation is adjusted according to its distance from each of the backsight points (for a conventional survey) or calibration points (for a GPS survey). The following formula is used to calculate the weight to give the residuals of each backsight or calibration point: p = 1/D

where: p is the weight of the backsight or calibration point

D is the distance to the backsight or calibration point n is the weight exponent

A weighted average is then computed and the resulting delta values are applied to each new observation to get an adjusted grid position.

Note - A high value for the weight exponent results in low impact (weight) of distant backsight or calibration points.

For Neighborhood adjustment to be applied, the station setup or calibration must have at least 3 known points with 2D grid residuals. That is, if you perform a:

•

Station setup plus, you must have HA VA SD observations to at least 2 backsight points, each with

• known 2D coordinates.

Resection, you must have HA VA SD observations to at least 3 backsight points, each with known 2D

• coordinates.

Calibration, you must have GPS observations to at least 3 control points, each with known 2D coordinates.

Notes

•

Neighborhood adjustment will use a GPS site calibration only if it has been observed in the current

Trimble Survey Controller job. This is because a GPS calibration that is part of the coordinate system

• in an uploaded job does not include the GPS calibration residuals.

For Station setup plus, the known station coordinate is included in the neighborhood adjustment

• calculation. In the calculation, the station coordinate is given grid residuals of zero.

Neighborhood adjustment is a 2D-only adjustment. Any vertical residuals from station setup or

• calibration are not used in the neighborhood adjustment calculations.

Neighborhood adjustment using GPS site calibration residuals is applied to all WGS84 points in the job, not just GPS observations.

Warning - Make sure that the backsight or calibration points are around the perimeter of the site. Do not survey outside the area enclosed by the backsight or calibration points (and for Station setup plus, the station point). The neighborhood adjustment is not valid beyond this perimeter.

126

Road cross section interpolation method

Two methods of interpolating between cross sections are supported:

• interpolation by elevation

• interpolation by cross slope

See

Roading template - Example alignment for a description of the two methods.

127

Survey - General

Survey Menu

Use this menu to measure and stake out points using the Survey Styles defined in the Trimble Survey

Controller software.

For more information, see:

RTK and Infill Surveys

Getting Started

All surveys in Trimble Survey Controller are controlled by a Survey Style. Survey Styles define the parameters for configuring and communicating with your instruments, and for measuring and storing points.

This whole set of information is stored as a template and used each time you start a survey.

Configure the style only if the defaults do not suit your needs. To change the configuration of the Trimble

Survey Controller software for different types of survey, select Configuration / Survey Styles from the main menu.

After this, whenever you want to use a particular survey style, you can select it from the Survey menu.

Note - If there is only one survey style, it is automatically selected when you choose Survey from the main menu. Otherwise, select a style from the list that appears.

For details on how to set up these two types of surveys, see

Conventional Surveys,

or Real-Time Kinematic

Surveys.

For details on how to set up an Integrated survey, see Integrated_Surveys.

For more information on other types of GPS surveys, see

GPS Surveys.

128

Getting Connected

The Trimble Survey Controller software can automatically connect to Trimble GPS and conventional instruments.

To auto-connect to a Trimble instrument, the software cycles through a set of connection protocols for each type of instrument. It can take up to 15 seconds to complete the cycle, which means it can take up to 15 seconds to automatically connect to a Trimble instrument, depending on where the software is in the auto-connect cycle when the instrument is connected.

There are three main groups of Trimble instruments that can be automatically connected: Trimble GPS receivers, Trimble VX/S Series total stations, Trimble 5600/3600 total stations.

If you connect to only one of these types of instrument, you can speed up the automatic connection time by clearing the check box for the instrument type(s) you do not connect to.

To set the auto-connect options, tap the auto-connect icon in the status bar before you connect to an instrument.

When the software is trying to automatically connect to an instrument, the auto-connect icon flashes. There is a different icon for each type of instrument. For example, if you select only Trimble GPS receivers, then only the Trimble GPS receiver icon flashes.

If the auto-connect icon displays all three icons, and is not flashing, then auto-connect has been disabled for all three groups of instruments.

You do not have to wait for auto-connect to connect to your instrument. To force a connection, select the survey style and start the survey at any time.

To connect to a non-Trimble instrument, you must force a connection by starting the surveying.

Tip - When using non-Trimble instruments, disable auto-connect. Some commands used by auto-connect can interfer with the communication of non-Trimble instruments.

PIN lock security for Trimble VX Spatial Station and Trimble S8 Total Station

To enter a PIN that locks and unlocks the Trimble VX Spatial Station and Trimble S8 Total Station, use the

Face 2 display.

When the instrument is locked, the controller cannot communicate with it, and the Trimble Survey Controller software will display the following message:

Instrument locked

The instrument is locked. Enter the PIN using the instrument Face 2 display. Once the PIN is accepted, tap OK below.

If the instrument is locked, and you forget your password, contact your local Trimble dealer for information on how to unlock the instrument.

129

Note - The PIN lock security support is available only when using instrument firmware version R10.0.58 or later.

Integrated Surveying

The Trimble Survey Controller software can switch between a GPS survey and a conventional survey, within the same job.

In an integrated survey, the controller is connected to both devices at the same time. This makes switching between instruments very quick.

For more information, see:

Integrated Surveys

GPS Surveys

Note - If there is only one survey style, it is automatically selected when you choose Survey from the main menu. Otherwise, select a style from the list that appears.

The Trimble Survey Controller software provides Survey Styles for the following GPS survey types:

FastStatic

Postprocessed Kinematic

Real-Time Kinematic

Real-Time Kinematic and Infill

To use one of the following survey types, you must create your own survey style.

Real-Time Kinematic and Data Logging

Real-Time Differential Survey

Real-Time Differential and Data Logging

For information on how to configure settings for GPS surveys, see the following topics:

Start Base Receiver

Measure Points

Measure Codes

130

Continuous Topo Points

Swap Base Receiver

Configuring the Survey Style for a Site Calibration

Initialization

Conventional Surveys

Note - If there is only one survey style, it is automatically selected when you choose Survey from the main menu. Otherwise, select a style from the list that apears.

The Trimble Survey Controller software provides a default style for use with a conventional instrument.

Configure this type of survey when you create or edit a survey style, then follow these steps to carry out a conventional survey.

Configure your survey style

Prepare for a robotic survey

Perform a station setup

Begin the survey

End the survey

Configure your survey style

Trimble Survey Controller automatically connects to Trimble VX/S Series, 5600, and 3600 instruments.

Configure the style only if the defaults do not suit your needs.

To configure a survey style:

1. From the main menu, select Configuration / Survey styles / <Style name>.

2. Select each of the options in turn, and set them to suit your equipment and survey preferences.

3. Once you configure all the settings, tap Store to save them, and then tap Esc to return to the main menu.

For more information, see:

Instrument

Laser rangefinder

Duplicate point tolerance

Traverse options

131

Prepare for a robotic survey

To prepare a Trimble VX/S Series or 5600 instrument for a robotic survey, the instrument must be turned on, leveled, with the correct radio settings, and if required, a search window defined.

If the instrument is level, has the correct radio settings, and you are using the autocentered search window, press the trigger button to turn on the instrument for a robotic survey.

To configure the Radio channel and Network ID on a Trimble VX/S Series instrument without using the

Trimble Survey Controller software, select [Radio settings] on the instrument through the Face 2 menu display.

For more information, refer to the documentation for your instrument.

Note - Trimble Survey Controller cannot communicate with the Trimble VX/S Series instrument when the onboard programs are in use. Once you finish using the instrument's onboard programs, select [Exit] from the

[Setup] menu to return to the [Waiting for connection] menu.

The following section describes how to level the instrument, configure the radio settings, and set the search window on the instrument through the Trimble CU controller.

Preparing the Trimble VX/S Series instrument for a Robotic survey

1. With the Trimble CU attached to the Trimble VX/S Series instrument, press the trigger button to turn on the instrument and controller.

2. Start the Trimble Survey Controller software, level the instrument and then tap Accept in the leveling screen.

Tap Esc to exit the Corrections screen and the Trimble Survey Controller Basic screen if they appear.

3. From the Trimble Survey Controller main menu, select Instrument / Radio settings.

4. Set the Radio channel and Network ID and then tap Accept.

5. Do one of the following:

•

To set a search window: a. From the main menu, select Survey / Start Robotic. b. Select Define now and tap OK. c. Aim the instrument to the Top left corner of the search window and tap OK. d. Aim the instrument to the Bottom right corner of the search window and tap OK. e. Tap OK to suspend the controller ready for robotic operation.

•

If you plan to use an Autocentered search window, press the power key on the Trimble CU to suspend

the controller.

You do not need to define the search window now.

6. Remove the controller from the instrument and attach it to the robotic holder.

7. Press the power key on the Trimble CU. The Trimble Survey Controller software auto-connects to the instrument radio and displays the leveling screen. If required, level the instrument and tap Accept.

You are now ready to perform a station setup.

132

Preparing the Trimble 5600 instrument for a Robotic survey

1. With the Trimble CU attached to the Trimble 5600 instrument, press the trigger button to turn on the instrument and controller.

2. Start the Trimble Survey Controller software, level the instrument and then tap Accept in the leveling screen.

Tap Esc to exit the Corrections screen and the Trimble Survey Controller Basic screen if they appear.

3. From the Trimble Survey Controller main menu, select Instrument / Radio settings.

4. Set the Radio channel, Station address and Remote address and then tap Accept.

5. Do one of the following:

•

To set a search window: a. From the main menu, select Survey / Start Robotic. b. Aim the instrument to the Top left corner of the search window and tap OK. c. Aim the instrument to the Bottom right corner of the search window and tap OK. d. Tap OK to suspend the controller ready for robotic operation.

•

If you plan to use an Autocentered search window, press the power key on the Trimble CU to suspend

the controller.

You do not need to define the search window now.

6. Remove the controller from the instrument and then attach the controller to the robotic holder: a. Connect the Trimble CU to Port A on the remote radio using the Trimble CU holder or a 0.4

m, 4-pin Hirose cable.

b. Turn on the active target or connect it to Port B on the remote radio.

7. Press the power key on the Trimble CU. The Trimble Survey Controller software auto-connects to the instrument radio and displays the leveling screen. If required, level the instrument and then tap

Accept.

You are now ready to perform a station setup.

Note - The 5600 is re-initialized to compensate for the earlier removal of the controller.

When the instrument is suspended ready for robotic operation, it switches off to conserve power. The internal radio remains switched on so that the rover radio can communicate with the instrument when you start the rover survey.

Note - The internal radio settings are set when the Trimble Survey Controller software connects to the instrument. The remote radio settings are set later when you start the rover survey.

For more information, see Radio settings.

Perform a station setup

To get the most out of the Station setup routine, tap Options to configure Station setup to match the way that you prefer to work.

133

You can configure the default point names, default heights, default instrument coordinates, and the default azimuth. Default instrument coordinates and default azimuth are used only if the instrument point is not already coordinated, and an azimuth to the backsight cannot be computed.

The Default point names option determines the default values for the instrument and the backsight point name fields each time you perform a station setup:

•

If you always use the same names for your instrument and backsight points, select Last used. Use this method if you always use the default instrument coordinates, or if you repeatedly set up on the same

• known point.

If you are performing a traverse type survey, select Traversing. When you start a new station setup, by default, the instrument uses the first foresight point observed from the last station setup for the

Instrument point name, and the instrument point name used in the last station setup for the Backsight

• point name.

If you want to key in or select the instrument and backsight point names each time you perform a station setup, select All null.

Note - These are only default values. You should select the option that matches your normal workflow. You can override the default values for any particular station setup.

Note - Do not confuse the Last used option with the Use last survey menu option.

The Last used option applies to a new station setup. The last values are used even across different jobs.

The Use last menu option reinstates the last station setup. No new station setup is performed.

The Default heights option determines the default values for the instrument and the backsight point height fields each time you perform a station setup.

•

If you always use the same heights for your instrument and backsight points, select Last used. This

• option is available only if you set the Default point names option to Last used.

If you are using the Trimble traverse kit (so that the last measured foresight and instrument heights can be used as the new instrument and backsight heights), select Move forward. This option is

• available only if you set the Default point names option to Traversing.

If you want to key in a new instrument and backsight height for each station setup, select All null.

If the instrument point does not exist, the default instrument coordinates are used. This is particularly useful if you work in a local coordinate system, and always set up your instrument on coordinate (0,0,0) or (1000N,

2000E, 100El), for example. If you leave the Default instrument coordinates set to null, you can key in coordinates for instrument points that do not exist when you perform a station setup.

If an azimuth cannot be computed between the instrument and backsight points, the Default azimuth is used.

Note - If you always set up your instrument on a known point, and use a known azimuth, then leave the

Default instrument coordinates and Default azimuth fields set to null. This ensures that you do not accidentally use default values if you incorrectly enter the name of the instrument and/or the backsight point names.

The Trimble Survey Controller software normally expects you to measure a backsight point to orient your survey. If your survey practice does not require you to measure to the backsight, clear the Measure backsight

134

checkbox on the second page of options. The software automatically creates a virtual backsight,

Backsightxxxx (where xxxx is a unique suffix, for example, Backsight0001), using the current instrument orientation as the azimuth.

Tip - If the instrument is correctly set up and oriented, you are satisfied that the last station setup is still valid, and you wish to continue observing points from this station, select Survey / Use last to use the last completed station setup.

Note - Before you can use the Turn to or Joystick functions to turn a servo or robotic instrument, you must have a current station setup.

To perform a station setup:

1. From the main menu, select Survey /

Note - If you have only one style, it is automatically selected.

Set the corrections associated with the instrument.

If the Corrections form does not appear, set the corrections by selecting Options from the Station

setup screen. To have the Corrections form display on startup, select the Show corrections on startup option.

For some instruments, the Trimble Survey Controller software automatically checks to see if various corrections (PPM, prism constant, and curvature and refraction) are being applied correctly. When you select Station setup, messages showing what has or has not been checked are displayed in the status line. If the Trimble Survey Controller software finds that the corrections are being applied twice, a warning message appears. When using the 5600 3600 instrument style, all corrections are applied in Trimble Survey Controller.

Note - When using a non-Trimble instrument, you must select the correct survey style before you connect the controller to the instrument. Otherwise, the instrument and controller may fail to connect.

2. Enter the instrument point name and the instrument height.

When measuring to the bottom notch on a Trimble VX/S Series instrument, tap the advanced pop-up arrow ( ) and then select Bottom notch. Enter the height measured to the top ridge of the bottom notch on the instrument.

Trimble Survey Controller corrects this measured slope value to true vertical and adds the offset 0.158

m (0.518 sft) to calculate true vertical to the trunnion axis.

Note - If you select Bottom notch, the minimum slope distance (Hm) that you can enter is 0.300

meters. This is approximately the minimum slope distance that can be physically measured. If this minimum is too low, you must measure to the top mark.

For details, see the following figure and table.

135

0.158m Offset from bottom notch to trunnion axis.

Measured slope distance.

Hm corrected from slope to true vertical.

Hc + 0.158m. True vertical instrument height.

Note - For a 2D or planimetric survey, leave the Instrument height field set to null (?). No elevations will be calculated. Unless you are using a Scale only projection, you must define a project height in the coordinate system definition. The Trimble Survey Controller software needs this information to reduce measured ground distances to ellipsoid distances, and to compute 2D coordinates.

3. Enter the backsight point name.

Tip - If the point is available from a linked file, select the linked file for the job and enter the point name in the Instrument point name or Backsight point name field. The point is automatically copied to the job.

4. Choose an option in the Method field. The options are:

♦

Angles and distance - measure horizontal and vertical angles and slope distance

♦

Angles only - measure horizontal and vertical angles

♦

H. Angle only - measure horizontal angle only

♦

Averaged observations - measure horizontal and vertical angles, and slope distance for a

predefined number of observations

5. If necessary, enter the target height for the backsight.

When measuring to the bottom notch on a Trimble prism base, tap the advanced pop-up arrow (

) and then select Bottom notch.

6. Sight the center of the backsight target and tap Measure.

Select the View before storage check box to view observations before they are stored.

136

7. If you are performing a

resection or

station setup plus

, you can add more backsight points/observations to the station setup.

8. If the residuals for the station setup are acceptable, tap Close and then tap Store.

Station Setup is complete.

Begin the survey

To do this:

1. From the main menu, select either Survey / Measure points or Survey / Stakeout.

If you chose Measure points: a. Enter a point name and code.

b. Choose one of the methods of observation.

c. Enter a target height, if required.

When measuring to the bottom notch on a Trimble prism base, tap the advanced pop-up arrow (

) and then select Bottom notch. d. Tap Measure to observe the point.

e. Tap Store to save the observation to the database.

f. Tap Check to measure check shots to any known points.

g. Move to the next point and measure it.

If you chose Stakeout: a. Tap Add to add the points you want to stake out to the stakeout list.

b. Select the point to stake out now, and use the graphics and text to stake out the point.

c. When the instrument is within the angular tolerance (as indicated by two hollow/outline arrows), tap

Measure.

d. Tap Accept to view the stakeout deltas.

e. Tap Store to save the point.

f. Continue until all points have been staked out.

g. To make a servo instrument turn to the point, tap Turn. If Servo auto turn is set to HA and VA or HA only, the instrument automatically turns, if it can compute the angle to the point.

h. To review stored points, select Review current job from the Files menu.

End the survey

To do this:

1. From the main menu, select Survey / End survey.

2. Tap Yes to confirm.

3. Turn off the controller.

Warning - The current station setup is lost when you select End Survey.

137

If a survey is running, end it before editing the current survey style or changing survey styles. You must also end the survey before accessing job functions such as copying. For more information, see

Job.

For more information, see:

Station Setup - Single backsights

Measure a point in two faces

Measure Points

The process of recording GPS or conventional instrument data is known as measuring. To measure points, do one of the following:

•

From the Favorites menu, select Measure points.

•

From the Survey menu, select Measure points or Measure topo.

138

•

From the Map, select Measure (only available when nothing in the map is selected).

The types of points that you can measure depend on your survey style and the survey method used.

Conventional Surveys

In conventional surveys, you can measure the following types of points:

•

Measure topo

•

Check points

If you are measuring points with codes, you can use

Measure topo,

but you may find

Measure codes

more useful. Measure codes uses a 9-button pallet that makes measuring codes easier and faster.

To measure a line of points at a fixed interval, select

Continuous topo from the Survey menu.

If a point is inaccessible, you can also measure horizontal angle

and distance

offsets to the point.

To measure a point that cannot be observed directly with a pole in a plumb position use the

Dual prism

measurement method.

To calculate a center point of a circular object such as a water tank or silo, use the

Circular object

option.

To measure multiple sets of observations, select

Measure rounds from the Survey menu.

To calculate the height of a remote object if the instrument does not support DR mode, or you cannot measure

a distance, use the Remote Object method.

To automatically store measurements along a remote surface that you have defined, use either the

Scanning

the Surface Scan method.

You can also Measure a point on two faces.

Tip - In Point name fields there is a Find softkey that lets you search for the next available point name. For example, if your job contains points numbered in the 1000s, 2000s and 3000s, and you want to find the next available point name after 1000:

1. In the Point name field, tap Find. The Find next free point name screen appears.

2. Enter the point name you want to start searching from (in this example, 1000) and tap Enter.

The Trimble Survey Controller software searches for the next available point name after 1000 and inserts it in the Point name field.

GPS Surveys

In GPS surveys, you can measure the following types of points:

In real-time GPS surveys, you can measure the following types of points:

139

•

Topo point

•

Observed control point

•

Calibration point

•

Rapid point

To measure a line of points at a fixed interval, select

Continuous topo from the Survey menu.

In postprocessed surveys, you can measure the following types of points:

•

Topo point

•

Observed control point

•

FastStatic points

To measure a line of points at a fixed interval, select

Continuous topo from the Survey menu.

Measure Codes

To measure and code Conventional or GPS observations in one step, select the feature code you want to measure and store from a coding form containing nine buttons that you can define. You can define multiple groups or pages of codes, each consisting of up to nine codes.

In the Measure codes form, if you activate the Code button, it affects the behavior of the nine configurable code buttons. When you then tap one of the configurable code buttons, the code on that button is added to the code field at the bottom of the Measure codes form. Typically, you can use the Code button to combine codes from multiple code buttons where features combine, either from the current group, or a combination of groups. You can also use it to enter a new code.

If a code has attributes, the attribute values appear at the bottom of the Measure codes form. You cannot directly edit these attribute values in the form. To change the attribute values, do one of the following:

•

Tap Attrib in the Measure codes form.

•

Tap Attrib in the Measure topo/Measure points form.

•

If Prompt for attributes is enabled, enter the attributes when prompted.

♦

If you pre-entered attributes using the Attrib softkey, you are not prompted for attributes.

For more information, see Using Feature Codes with Predefined Attributes.

To add a feature code group and assign codes to the buttons:

1. Select Survey / Measure codes and then tap Add group.

2. Enter a Group name and then tap OK.

3. To add a code to a button:

♦

Tap and hold on the button. When the tooltip message appears, remove the stylus from the screen. In the dialog that appears, enter the code, or select a code from the feature code

♦ library.

Navigate to the button using the arrow keys, and then press the Space key, which emulates the

140

'tap and hold' action.

In the dialog that appears, enter the code, or select a code from the feature code library. Tap OK. The code you entered now appears on the button.

If required, you can also enter additional descriptions.

4. To add another code, or remove a code from a button, repeat Step 3.

5. To add more groups of feature code buttons, tap Add group.

To navigate to a particular group, select it from the drop down list in the top left of the form.

Alternatively, use A - Z to quickly switch to group pages 1 - 26. This method is not available if the

Code button in enabled.

To measure and code observations using Measure codes:

1. Select Survey / Measure codes.

2. To initiate a measurement, activate the button using one of the following methods:

♦

Tap the button.

♦

Press the numeric key on the controller keyboard corresponding to the button. Keys 7, 8, 9, activate the top row of buttons, keys 4, 5, 6 activate the middle row of buttons, keys 1, 2, 3

♦ activate the bottom row of buttons.

Use the arrows keys on the controller to navigate to the button and then press Enter.

If the code has attributes, the attribute values appear at the bottom of the Measure codes form.

3. To automatically start the measurement when the button is selected, tap Options and then select the

Auto measure check box.

Note - When the method is set to Distance offset, Angles only, and H Angle only, Automeasure is temporarily paused.

4. To configure the position of the highlight for the next code, tap Options and then configure the

Direction of the Template pickup.

5. The code field is set to the code on the button and the measurement is initiated. The measurement is automatically stored depending on the setting in Options:

♦

In a GPS survey, set the Topo point options to Auto store point.

♦

In a Conventional survey, clear the View before storage check box in the Measure point

options form.

If descriptions were defined on the Measure codes button, the descriptions are also set to the descriptions on the button.

6. Once you store the measurement, the Measure codes form appears, ready for the next measurement.

Tap [Enter] to measure a point with the same code again, or use one of the methods described in step

2 above to measure with a different code.

141

The Measure topo/Measure points form, where the measurement was initiated, remains open in the background. If you need to change the point name or measurement method, tap Switch to to switch to this form, change the fields as required and then tap Switch to again to return to the Measure codes form.

Using Template pickup

Use the Template pickup feature to automatically move the highlight from the current button to the next button after storing a measurement. Template pickup is particularly useful when coding observations in a regular pattern, for example, across a road template.

To configure template pickup, tap Options and then configure:

•

The template pickup Direction:

♦

Left to right

♦

Right to left

♦

Zig zag

•

The Number of template elements:

♦

The Number of template elements configured should match the number of elements across the template, and the number of buttons configured in Measure codes.

To skip a code, tap a different button, or use the arrow keys to select an alternative code button.

Notes

•

The first time that you use Measure codes, the measurement may not begin automatically if you have not defined the point name and target height. If this occurs, complete these fields and then tap

•

Measure to begin the measurement.

To change target or antenna heights, tap the target icon in the status bar.

•

During a measurement, you can change the point name, and the target or antenna height and code.

However, you can do this only if you start editing before the observation is stored. Alternatively, tap

Esc as soon as the measurement begins, make the required changes, then tap Measure to restart the

• measurement.

To change the EDM or measurement method, tap Esc during the measurement, make the required

• changes, then tap Measure to restart the measurement.

To change the point name or measurement method before you start a measurement, tap Switch to to switch to the Measure topo/Measure points form, change the fields as required and then tap Switch to

• again to return to the Measure codes form.

To measure a point with a null code, activate a blank code button. Alternatively, tap Code, ensure that

• the code field is empty and then tap Measure.

To store a

note with an observation, tap

•

To delete an entire group of codes, select the group and then tap Delete.

Stringing support

Measure codes has '+' and '-' softkeys that enable you to apply a suffix to the code on the button. This is useful when you use the stringing method for feature coding.

You can configure the suffix to 1, 01, 001, or 0001.

142

When the suffix is configured to 01, tap '+' to increase the code "Fence" to "Fence01". Tap '-' to decrease the code by 01.

Note - The suffix is applied to the code on the button. If the suffix is 01 and you select '+' for a button that has the code "Fence01", the code increases to "Fence0101".

Tap Find to find the next available string for the currently highlighted button.

Attributes and Base codes

You can configure the Trimble Survey Controller software to provide attributes for the complete code, or from a portion of the code - the "base code".

Typically, base codes are used when you use the '+' and '-' softkeys to "string" feature codes. For example, when you code a fence where all observations coded "Fence01" are joined together and all observations coded

"Fence02" are joined together, and so on, and they all have the same attributes. In this example, you can create feature code libraries that contain all the "Fence**" codes, or contain just the base code "Fence".

If you do not string codes, or if you do string codes but you include the entire code in the feature code library, then you are not using base codes. Disable Use attributes of base code (clear the check box).

If you do string codes, and the feature and attribute library includes only the base code, then enable Use

attributes of base code (select the check box).

In the Trimble Survey Controller software, you can use the extra power of Measure codes to create a button that contains a numeric or alpha-numeric code (the base code) and then append a numeric suffix using the ‘+’ or ‘-’ softkeys. For codes entered into any other code field in the Trimble Survey Controller software, you cannot use the ‘+’ or ‘-’ softkeys to append a suffix, so when you use base codes, the software can only attempt to determine the base code by stripping the numeric characters from the end of the codes.

The following rules help to explain the base code:

•

In Measure codes:

1. When Use attributes of base code is disabled, the code displayed on a button is the base code.

◊

Enter "Fence", string the code to become "Fence01", the attributes are derived from

"Fence01".

2. When Use attributes of base code is enabled, the code entered on a button is the base code.

◊

Enter "Fence", string the code to become "Fence01", the attributes are derived from

"Fence".

3. If you edit or change the code on a button, the base code resets, using rule 1 or rule 2 above.

4. If you change the configuration of the Use attributes of base code setting, the base code resets, using rule 1 or rule 2 above.

5. When Measure codes ‘passes’ the code to the Measure topo, or Measure points system, the base code from within Measure codes is retained.

•

In any other code field of the Trimble Survey Controller software:

1. When Use attributes of base code is disabled, the code entered is the base code.

2. When Use attributes of base code is enabled, the base code is determined by ‘internally’ stripping any numeric characters from the end of the code.

143

3. When Use attributes of base code is enabled, and you edit a code that is ‘passed’ from

Measure codes, the base code is re-derived by ‘internally’ stripping any numeric characters from the end of the code.

Notes

•

If you use attributes and numeric codes with a string suffix, you must use Measure codes to define the suffix and start the measurement. Measure codes understands where the code ends and the suffix starts. If you do not use Measure codes, the entire numeric code + suffix will be treated as the code,

• the suffix cannot be determined, and attributes for the base code will not be available.

To configure Use attributes of base code, from within Measure codes, use the up arrow softkey to

• select Options, and then select the check box as required.

The Use attributes of base code setting is configured within Measure codes, but is applied throughout

• the Trimble Survey Controller software.

If you edit the code on a button when Use attributes of base code is disabled, the entire code from the

• code button is displayed in the Edit field.

If you edit the code on a button when Use attributes of base code is enabled, the base code is displayed in the Edit field.

♦

The code on the button is "Fence01" and the base code is "Fence". If you edit this code, the base code "Fence" is displayed.

•

You can string alphanumeric codes when Use attributes of base code is disabled. The code displayed

• on the button is the base code.

You cannot string numeric only codes when Use attributes of base code disabled.

Tip - If you use multiple codes with attributes, enter all the codes before you enter the attributes.

Sharing Measure codes groups between controllers

The groups, and the codes within each group, are stored in a Measure Codes Database file (*.mcd).

If you use a feature and attribute library, the Measure Codes Database file (*.mcd) is tied to that feature and attribute library and has a matching name. If you use the same feature and attribute library on other controllers, you can copy the *.mcd file to use in the other controllers. To use the feature and attribute library

*.mcd file, you must assign the feature and attribute library to the job.

If you do not use a feature and attribute library, a [Default.mcd] file is created. The [Default.mcd] file can also be copied to other controllers. When the Trimble Survey Controller software does not have a feature and attribute library assigned to a job, the [Default.mcd] file is used in Measure codes.

Roading

You can stake out, or measure your position relative to a:

•

Trimble road

• road defined in a GENIO file

144

And you can stake out:

• road defined in a LandXML file

For more information, see:

Tunnels

You can scan or manually measure positions relative to a tunnel.

For more information, see:

Key in - Tunnels

Survey - Tunnels

Stakeout - Overview

In a real-time GPS survey or a conventional survey, you can stake out points, lines, arcs, polylines, alignments, roads, and DTMs.

To stake out an item:

•

Define the item to be staked out.

•

From the map, or from Survey / Stakeout, select the item to be staked out.

•

Navigate to the point, or direct the person holding the rod to the point.

•

Mark the point.

•

Measure the point (optional).

You can define the item to be staked out in the Key in menu, or you can use a

linked file

to add the points to the stakeout list.

You can define the item to be staked out:

145

• in the Key in menu

• with a

linked CSV or job file

• from lines and arcs uploaded with the job file

• from an active map file

• from an alignment (.rxl) or road (.rxl, crd, .inp, .mos, or .xml)

To stake out a line between two points without keying the line into the job database, you can select two points from the map, tap and hold in the map to access the pop-up menu and then select Stake out line.

To use GPS to stake out lines, arcs, Digital Terrain Models, and roads, you must define a projection and datum transformation.

Warning - Do not change the coordinate system or calibration after you have staked out points.

For more information, see:

(polylines)

Stakeout - Display mode

Stakeout - Options

Using the Graphical display

Fast Fix

Tap Fast fix to quickly measure and automatically store a construction point. Alternatively, select Fast fix from the pop-up menu in the Point name field.

Note - In a real-time GPS survey, Fast fix uses the Rapid point method. In a conventional survey, Fast fix uses the current measurement mode.

If you need more flexibility, select Measure from the pop-up menu in the Point name field.

Typically, a construction point is used in Cogo - compute points or Key in - lines and arcs.

Construction points are stored in the Trimble Survey Controller database with autopoint names that increment

146

from Temp0000. They are classified higher than as-staked points and lower than normal points. For more

information, see Database Search Rules.

To view construction points in a map or list, tap Filter and select them from the Select filter list.

Topo Point

This is a previously configured method of measuring and storing a point. Configure this type of point when you create or edit a Survey Style.

Use the Auto point step size field to set the increment size for automatic point numbering. The default is 1, but you can use larger step sizes and negative steps.

You can store quality control information with each point measurement. Options may include QC1,

QC1 & QC2, and QC1 & QC3, depending on the type of survey.

The Occupation time and Number of measurements together define the time that the receiver is static while measuring a point and the criteria for both must be met before the point can be stored. When the Occupation

time and Number of measurements criteria have been met, Store is available. Alternatively, if Auto store point is enabled the point is stored automatically.

During the occupation, the RTK engine in the GNSS receiver converges on a solution and it is this converged solution that is saved in the Trimble Survey Controller job file when the point is stored.

You can configure Occupation time and Number of measurements criteria in the Survey style or under

Options.

In an RTK survey, when you select the Auto tolerance check box, the software calculates horizontal and vertical precision tolerances that meet the GPS receiver's RTK specifications for the baseline length you are measuring. If you want to enter your own precision tolerances, clear this check box.

Measuring a Topo Point in a GPS Survey

You can measure a topo point in every type of survey except a FastStatic survey.

To measure a topo point:

1. Do one of the following:

♦

From the main menu, select Survey / Measure points

♦

Tap Favorites and select Measure points

♦

From the Map, select Measure (only available when nothing in the map is selected).

To automatically start the measurement when you select Measure from the map, tap Options and then select the Auto measure check box.

2. Enter values in the Point name and Code fields (the Code field entry is optional), and select Topo

point in the Type field.

147

3. Enter a value in the Antenna height field and make sure that the setting in the Measured to field is set appropriately.

4. When the antenna is vertical and stationary, tap Measure to start recording data. The static icon appears in the status bar.

Tip - You can tap Enter to accept the measurement before the occupation time or precisions have been satisfied.

5. When the preset occupation time and precisions have been reached, tap Store.

Tip - In the survey style, select the Auto store point check box to automatically store the point when the preset occupation time and precisions have been met.

Check Point

GPS

In a real-time GPS survey, measure a point twice. Give the second point the same name as the first point. If the duplicate point tolerances are set to zero, the Trimble Survey Controller software warns that the point is a duplicate when you try to store it. Select Store as check to store the second point as a check class point. For

more information, see Duplicate point: Out of tolerance screen.

Conventional

In a conventional total station survey, tap Check to measure a check class point.

To measure a check point:

1. In the Point name field, enter the name of the point to check.

2. In the Method field, select a measurement method and enter the required information in the fields that appear.

3. In the Target height field, enter the height of the target and then tap Measure.

When measuring to the bottom notch on a Trimble prism base, tap the advanced pop-up arrow (

) and then select Bottom notch.

If you did not select the View before storage check box, the point is stored with a classification of

Check. If you selected the View before storage check box, the check shot deltas appear on the Check

shot screen.

When you observe the point, if the station setup is the same as when you originally measured the point, the deltas are the difference in values between the original observation and the check observation. The deltas displayed are horizontal angle, vertical distance, horizontal distance, and slope distance.

If the station setup is different from when you originally measured the point, the deltas are in terms of

148

the best coordinates from the original point to the check point. The deltas displayed are azimuth, vertical distance, horizontal distance, and slope distance.

4. Tap Enter to store the check point. Tap Esc to abandon the measurement.

Tap Chk BS to display the Check backsight screen. This is similar to the Check point screen, but the Point

name field shows the backsight of the current station setup. You cannot edit this field.

To observe a check shot to the backsight, use the same procedure as described above.

To return to the Check point screen, tap Chk topo.

End Survey

To end the current survey, select End survey from the Survey.

When you end a GPS survey, the software asks you if you want to power down the receiver.

When you end a Conventional survey with Robotic instruments, the software asks you if you want to power down the instrument. If the instrument is powered down this way, starting the survey again automatically starts the instrument.

Warning - The current station setup is lost when you select End Survey.

When you are using an Integrated survey, you get choose to end the GPS survey, the Conventional survey, or both surveys.

149

Survey - Conventional

Measuring topo points in a Conventional Survey

To measure a topographic point using the Trimble Survey Controller software and a conventional instrument:

From the main menu, select Survey and then perform a station setup,station setup plus,resection,

When measuring to the bottom notch on a Trimble prism base, tap the advanced pop-up arrow (

2. From the Survey menu, select Measure topo.

3. Enter a value in the Point name field.

4. If necessary, enter a feature code in the Code field.

5. In the Method field, select a measurement method.

6. Enter a value in the Target height field and then tap Measure.

) and then select Bottom notch.

If you selected the View before storage

check box in the survey style, the measurement information appears on the screen. If necessary, edit the target height and code. Tap the view display button on the left of the measurement information to change the display and then do one of the following:

•

To store the point, tap Store.

•

Turn the instrument to the next point and then tap Read. The last point is stored and a measurement is made to the next point.

If you did not select the View before storage check box, the point is stored automatically and the point name increments (based on the Auto point step size setting). The Trimble Survey Controller software stores the raw observations (HA, VA, and SD).

Notes

•

If you selected the Auto average option, and an observation to a duplicate point is within the specified duplicate point tolerances, the observation and the computed average position (using all the available

• point positions) are automatically stored.

To produce an averaged coordinate, Trimble Survey Controller software averages the grid coordinates calculated from the underlying coordinates or observations. Observations that do not allow a grid coordinate to be resolved (for example, angles only observations) are not included in the average coordinate.

To change the settings for the current survey, tap Options. You can not change the current survey style or the system settings.

If you are using a servo or robotic instrument to measure a known (coordinated) point, tap Turn.

Alternatively, with a servo instrument, set the Servo auto turn field in the survey style to HA & VA, or HA

only to automatically turn the instrument to the point.

150

Tips

•

You can tap Enter while measuring an Averaged observations to accept the measurement before the

• required number of observations has been completed.

You can tap Enter while measuring a Direct Reflex (DR) point with a defined standard deviation to accept the measurement before the standard deviation has been satisfied.

If you are measuring topo points with feature codes, you may find Measure codes faster and easier to use than

Measure topo.

If you are using a Leica TPS1100 instrument with Measure topo, you can initiate the measurement on the instrument and then store the measurement in the Trimble Survey Controller software. For more information on how to do this and on how to configure the Leica TPS1100 instrument, see

Configuring a Leica TPS1100

Instrument to Record data to Trimble Survey Controller.

Measurement Methods

For more information on the different measurement methods see the following:

Angles and distance

Angles only, H.Angle only

Angle Offset, H. Angle Offset, and V. Angle Offset

Distance offset

Dual Prism

Circular Object

Remote Object

Scanning

Surface Scan

You can also Measure a point on two faces.

Use the Auto point step size field to set the increment size for automatic point numbering. The default is 1, but you can use larger step sizes and negative steps.

Select the View before storage check box to view observations before they are stored.

151

Station Setup

In a conventional survey, you must complete a station setup to orientate the instrument:

1. From the main menu, select Survey / (Selected survey style) / Station setup.

The menu that appears varies according to whether or not you have a current station setup.

Note - If you have only one style, it is automatically selected.

Set the corrections associated with the instrument.

If the Corrections form does not appear, tap Options from the Station setup screen to set the corrections.

To make the Corrections form appear on startup, select the Show corrections on startup option.

3. Enter the instrument point name and the instrument height. If the point is not already in the database, you can key it in or leave it as null.

Trimble Survey Controller corrects this measured slope value to true vertical and adds the offset 0.158

m (0.518 sft) to calculate true vertical to the trunnion axis.

Note - If you select Bottom notch, the minimum slope distance (Hm) that you can enter is 0.300

meters. This is approximately the minimum slope distance that can be physically measured. If this minimum is too low, you must measure to the top mark.

Notes

♦

If the coordinates for the instrument point are not known, perform a resection to known points

♦ to coordinate the point.

For a 2D or planimetric survey, leave the Instrument height field set to null (?). No elevations are calculated. Unless you are using a Scale only projection, a project height must be defined in the coordinate system definition. Trimble Survey Controller software needs this information to reduce measured ground distances to ellipsoid distances and to compute 2D coordinates.

4. Enter the backsight point name and the target height. If there are no coordinates for the point, you can key in an azimuth.

When measuring to the bottom notch on a Trimble prism base, tap the advanced pop-up arrow (

) and then select Bottom notch.

Notes

152

♦

If you do not know the azimuth, you can enter an arbitrary value and then edit the azimuth

♦ record later, in review.

If you cannot determine the coordinates for the instrument or backsight point, you can key them in or measure them later using GPS (provided that there is a valid GPS site calibration).

♦

The coordinates of any points measured from that station are then computed.

When you enter the instrument point later, make sure that you choose to overwrite the original instrument point in the Duplicate point form. The coordinates of any points measured

♦ from that station are then computed.

You can use the Point manager to edit the coordinates of the instrument point. If you do, then

♦ the positions of all records that are computed from that station setup position may change.

You can use Point manager to edit the coordinateds of the backsight point. If you edit the point record that is used as a backsight in a station setup with a computed azimuth to the backsight, then the positions of all records that are computed from that station setup may change.

Tip - If the point is available from a linked file, select the linked file for the job and then enter the point name in the Instrument point name or Backsight point name field. The point is automatically copied to the job.

5. Choose an option in the Method field. The options are:

♦

Angles and distance - measure horizontal and vertical angles and slope distance

♦

Averaged observations - measure horizontal and vertical angles and slope distance for a

♦ predefined number of observations

Angles only - measure horizontal and vertical angles

♦

H. Angle only - measure horizontal angle only

♦

Angle offset - measure the slope distance first, the instrument can then be repointed and then

♦ measure the horizontal and vertical angles

H. Angle offset - measure the vertical angle and slope distance first, the instrument can then

♦ be repointed and then measure the horizontal angle

V. Angle offset - measure the horizontal angle and slope distance first, the instrument can

♦ then be repointed and then measure the vertical angle

Distance offset - enter the left/right, in/out or V.Dist offset from the target to the object when a point is inaccessible and then measure horizontal and vertical angles and slope distance to the offset object

When using an offset method, tap Options, and set the

Offset directions perspective.

6. Sight the center of the backsight target and then tap Measure.

7. If the residuals for the station setup are acceptable, tap Store.

Tip - To change the display, tap the view display button on the left of the measurement information.

Note - The residuals are the differences between the known position and the observed position of the backsight point.

Station setup is complete.

Tip - To get the most out of the Station setup routine, tap Options to configure Station setup to match the way that you prefer to work. For more information, see

Perform a station setup.

153

Note - If you want to measure more than one backsight point, use

Station setup plus.

Loading station data to a Trimble 5600 and ATS instrument

When you complete a station setup, Station setup plus, Resection, or Refline station setup with a Trimble

5600 or ATS instrument, the Trimble Survey Controller software loads the station information into the instrument.

Notes

•

The instrument does not accept a null instrument height. If the instrument height is set to null in the

Trimble Survey Controller software, then the software writes 0 to label V,50 and clears bit 1 in label

•

PV,52.

The instrument does not accept a null H.Dist. If the Trimble Survey Controller software cannot compute an H.Dist between the instrument and the backsight point (that is, Keyed in azimuth, Angles only, or H.Angle only backsight observation) then the software writes 0 to label PV,51.

For more information, see:

•

•

•

•

•

Set the corrections associated with the instrument.

Station setup plus

In a conventional survey, use Station setup plus to perform a station setup on a known point by making observations to one or more backsight points.

Warning - If the station setup point is a traverse station that you plan to adjust, do not measure more than one backsight point. Clear the Backsight check box for any additional points so that they are measured as foresights.

For more details, see:

•

Performing a Station setup plus

•

Station setup - Residuals screen

•

Skipping observations

•

Point - Residuals screen

•

Point details screen

•

Station setup results screen

Performing a Station setup plus

To perform a Station setup plus:

154

1. From the main menu, select Survey / Station setup plus.

If the Corrections form does not appear, tap Options and then select the Show corrections on startup check box.

3. Enter the instrument point name. If the point is not already in the database, key it in or leave it as null.

If the coordinates for the instrument point are not known, perform a Resection

to known points. This will provide the coordinates.

4. If applicable, enter the instrument height and then tap Accept.

Trimble Survey Controller corrects this measured slope value to true vertical and adds the offset 0.158

m (0.518 sft) to calculate true vertical to the trunnion axis.

Note - If you select Bottom notch, the minimum slope distance (Hm) that you can enter is 0.300

meters. This is approximately the minimum slope distance that can be physically measured. If this minimum is too low, you must measure to the top mark.

- For a 2D or planimetric survey, leave the Instrument height field set to null (?). No elevations is calculated.

- Once the station setup is started, you cannot enter a different instrument height.

Warning - Before you continue, tap Options and make sure that the Face order setting is correct.

You cannot change this setting after you start measuring points.

5. Enter the first backsight point name and the target height, if applicable. If there are no coordinates for the point, you can key in an azimuth.

When measuring to the bottom notch on a Trimble prism base, tap the advanced pop-up arrow (

) and then select Bottom notch.

If the point is available from a linked file, select the linked file for the job and then enter the point name in the Instrument point name or Backsight point name field. The point is automatically copied to the job.

Note - To include foresight points during Station setup plus, clear the Backsight check box. Foresight points do not contribute to the station setup result.

6. Choose an option in the Method field.

7. Sight the target and then tap Measure.

The Station setup residuals screen appears.

155

See the following sections for more information on what do next.

Skipping observations

When using Automate rounds you can configure the software to automatically skip obstructed foresight targets.

If the instrument cannot measure the point and Skip obstructed foresights is enabled, it skips that point and moves onto the next point in the rounds list.

If the instrument cannot measure the point and Skip obstructed foresights is disabled, a message appears after

60 seconds to indicate that the prism is obstructed.

The Trimble Survey Controller software continues to try to measure to the target until instructed to skip the point. To do this, tap Ok for the obstructed prism message, tap Pause and then tap Skip.

When the Trimble Survey Controller software reaches the end of a rounds list in which points have been skipped, the following message appears:

Observe skipped points?

Tap Yes to observe the points that were skipped during that round. The observations can be skipped again if required. Tap No to end the round.

If a point is skipped in one round, all subsequent rounds continue to prompt for observations to that point.

When one observation from a pair of face 1 and face 2 observations has been skipped, the unused observation is automatically deleted by the Trimble Survey Controller software. Deleted observations are stored in the

Trimble Survey Controller database and can be undeleted. Undeleted observations can be processed in the office software, but are not automatically used to recompute Mean Turned Angle (MTA) records in the

Trimble Survey Controller software.

Backsight observations cannot be skipped using the Skip obstructed foresights option.

Station setup - Residuals screen

The Station setup residuals screen lists the residuals for each point observed in the station setup.

Use the Station setup residuals screen to do the following:

•

To observe more points, tap + Point.

•

To view the Station setup results, tap Results.

•

To store the station setup, tap Results and then tap Store.

•

To view/edit the details of a point, highlight the point and then tap Details.

•

To view/edit the residuals of each individual observation to a point, tap the point in the list once.

•

To start measuring rounds of observations to the points, tap End face.

Tips

156

•

To highlight an item in a list, tap and hold the item for at least half a second.

•

To sort a column in ascending or descending order, tap the column header. Tap the Point column

• header to sort the point in ascending or descending observed order.

To change the residual display view, select an option from the drop-down list in the Residuals screen.

•

To navigate to a point, tap + Point and then tap Navigate.

Notes

•

A residual is the difference between the known position and the observed position of the backsight

• point(s).

A foresight point that does not yet exist in the database has null residuals in the Residuals form.

•

You cannot add the same point to a station setup more than once. To take further measurements to points already measured, select End Face. For more information, see

Measuring Rounds in Station setup plus or Resection.

Point - Residuals screen

The Point residuals screen lists the residuals for each observation to a point in the station setup.

Use the Point residuals screen to do the following:

•

To disable an observation, highlight it and then tap Use.

•

To view the details of an observation, highlight it and then tap Details.

•

To return to the Station setup residuals screen, tap Back.

Note - If you have measured face 1 and face 2 observations to a point, turning off the observation for one face will also turn off the observation for the other face.

Warning - If you turn off some (but not all) of the observations to a backsight point, the solution for the resection will be biased. There will be a different number of observations to each backsight point.

Point details screen

Use the Point details screen to:

• view the mean observation for a point in the station setup

• change the target height and/or prism constant for all observations to a point

Station setup results screen

The Station setup results screen shows information about the station setup solution.

Use the Station setup results screen to:

• return to the Station Setup Residuals screen (tap Esc)

• store the station setup (tap Store)

Note - During a Station setup plus, nothing is stored in the job until you tap Store in the Results screen.

157

Station setup is complete.

For more information, see:

•

Measuring Rounds in Station setup plus or Resection

•

•

Conventional surveys

•

Resection

•

Traverse

Measuring Rounds in Station setup plus or Resection

This topic describes how to measure multiple sets (rounds) of observations during a Station setup plus or

Resection.

A round can consist of either:

• a set of single face 1 observations

• a set of matched face 1 and face 2 observations

Using Station setup plus or Resection, measure the points that you want to include in the rounds. When the rounds list has been built, tap End Face.

Trimble Survey Controller software:

•

Directs you to change face when required. With servo-driven instruments, this happens

• automatically.

Defaults to the correct point details for each observed point.

•

Displays the results. This allows you to delete bad data.

For more details, see:

•

Building a rounds list

•

Measuring rounds of observations

•

Skipping observations

•

Residuals screen

•

Point - Residuals screen

•

Point details screen

•

Automated rounds

Building a rounds list

The rounds list contains the points used in the rounds observations. As each point is added to a Station setup

plus or Resection, Trimble Survey Controller software automatically builds this list. For more information, see

When all observations are complete, Trimble Survey Controller software shows the Residuals screen.

or Resection.

158

When the rounds list is complete, tap End face . Trimble Survey Controller software prompts you for the next point to be measured in the rounds of observations.

Notes

•

You can not edit the rounds list. Before you tap End face, be sure to observe all points to include in

• the rounds observations.

The top of the Measure rounds screen shows which face the instrument is on, the number of the current round, and the total number of rounds to be measured (shown in brackets). For example, Face

1 (1/3) shows that the instrument is on face 1 of the first round of three.

Measuring rounds of observations

Once the rounds list has been built, tap End face. Trimble Survey Controller software enters the default point name and target information for the next point in the rounds. To measure a point, tap Measure. Repeat this until all observations in the round are completed.

Notes

•

When using servo or robotic instruments, check that the instrument has sighted the target accurately.

Manually adjust it if necessary. Some instruments can perform accurate sighting automatically. For

• information on the instrument specifications, refer to the instrument manufacturer's documentation.

If you are using a servo or robotic instrument to measure a known (coordinated) point, tap Turn.

Alternatively, with a servo instrument, set the Servo auto turn field in the survey style to HA & VA, or

•

HA only to automatically turn the instrument to the point.

If you tap Esc in the Measure screen, the current round is discarded.

Skipping observations

When using Automate rounds you can configure the software to automatically skip obstructed foresight targets.

If the instrument cannot measure the point and Skip obstructed foresights is enabled, it skips that point and moves onto the next point in the rounds list.

If the instrument cannot measure the point and Skip obstructed foresights is disabled, a message appears after

60 seconds to indicate that the prism is obstructed.

The Trimble Survey Controller software continues to try to measure to the target until instructed to skip the point. To do this, tap Ok for the obstructed prism message, tap Pause and then tap Skip.

When the Trimble Survey Controller software reaches the end of a rounds list in which points have been skipped, the following message appears:

Observe skipped points?

159

Tap Yes to observe the points that were skipped during that round. The observations can be skipped again if required. Tap No to end the round.

If a point is skipped in one round, all subsequent rounds continue to prompt for observations to that point.

Trimble Survey Controller software.

Backsight observations cannot be skipped using the Skip obstructed foresights option.

Residuals screen

At the end of each round, the Residuals screen appears. For more information, see

more information, see Station setup plus or

Resection.

After you measure rounds, Std Dev becomes available in the Residuals screen. To view the standard deviations of the observations for each point, tap Std Dev.

Notes

•

To change the residual display view, use the drop-down list in the Residuals screen.

•

During a station setup plus or resection, nothing is stored to the job until you tap Close and Store to complete the station setup.

Point - Residuals screen

The Point - Residuals screen shows the residuals for the individual observations to a particular point. For

Resection.

Note - If you have measured both face 1 and face 2 observations to a point, when you turn off a face 1 observation, you also turn off the corresponding face 2 observation. Similarly, when you turn off a face 2 observation, you also turn off the corresponding face 1 observation.

Point details screen

The Point details screen shows the point name, code, backsight status, target height, prism constant, mean observation, and standard errors for the observed point. For more information, see

From the main menu, select Survey and then perform a station setup

Resection.

Automated rounds

The Automate rounds option is available for Trimble VX/S Series and 5600 instruments. When you select

Automate rounds, the instrument automatically completes all rounds after the rounds list has been built.

160

If you tap + Round after the instrument has completed the required number of rounds, the instrument performs one more round of observations. If you want the instrument to perform more than one extra round, enter the total number of required rounds before you tap + Round.

For example, to measure three rounds automatically, and then measure another three rounds:

1. Enter 3 in the Number of rounds field.

2. Once the instrument has measured 3 rounds, enter 6 in the Number of rounds field.

3. Tap + Round. The instrument measures the second group of 3 rounds.

Note - Targets observed without Autolock are automatically paused.

Station Elevation

In a conventional survey, use the station elevation function to determine the elevation of the instrument point by making observations to points with known elevations.

Note - Use only points that can be viewed as grid coordinates. (The station elevation calculation is a grid calculation.)

A station elevation needs at least one of the following:

• one angles and distance observation to a known point, or

• two angles only observations to different points

To perform a station elevation:

, or

Set the corrections associated with the instrument.

2. Select Survey / Station elevation. The instrument point name and code appear. If you entered the instrument height during the station setup, that also appears. Otherwise, enter the instrument height now. Tap Accept.

Trimble Survey Controller corrects this measured slope value to true vertical and adds the offset 0.158

m (0.518 sft) to calculate true vertical to the trunnion axis.

Note - If you select Bottom notch, the minimum slope distance (Hm) that you can enter is 0.300

meters. This is approximately the minimum slope distance that can be physically measured. If this minimum is too low, you must measure to the top mark.

3. Enter the point name, code, and target details for the point with the known elevation. Tap Measure.

Once the measurement is stored, the Point residuals appear.

4. From the Point residuals screen, tap one of the following softkeys:

161

♦

+ Point, to observe additional known points

♦

Details, to view or edit point details

♦

Use, to enable or disable a point

5. To view the station elevation result, tap Close in the Point residuals screen. To accept the result, tap

Store.

Note - The elevation determined through this station elevation method overwrites any existing elevation for the instrument point.

Resection

In a conventional survey, the resection function is used to perform a station setup and determine coordinates for an unknown point by making observations to known backsight points. The Trimble Survey Controller software uses a least-squares algorithm to compute the resection.

Note - To determine the elevation of a point with known 2D coordinates, perform a station elevation once you have completed a station setup.

A resection needs at least one of the following:

•

Two angles and distance observations to different backsight points

•

Three angles-only observations to different backsight points

•

One angles and distance observation to a close-by point and one angles-only observation to a backsight point. This is a special case called eccentric station setup.

Warning - Do not compute a resection point using WGS84 control and then change the coordinate system or perform a site calibration. If you do, the resection point will be inconsistent with the new coordinate system.

For more details, see:

•

Performing a resection

•

Resection - Residuals screen

•

Point - Residuals screen

•

Point details screen

•

Resection results screen

•

Eccentric station setup

Performing a resection

To perform a resection:

1. From the main menu, select Survey / Resection.

Note - If you have only one style, it is automatically selected.

162

If the Corrections form does not appear, tap Options and then select the Show corrections on startup check box.

3. Enter an instrument point name and instrument height, if applicable.

Trimble Survey Controller corrects this measured slope value to true vertical and adds the offset 0.158

m (0.518 sft) to calculate true vertical to the trunnion axis.

Note - If you select Bottom notch, the minimum slope distance (Hm) that you can enter is 0.300

meters. This is approximately the minimum slope distance that can be physically measured. If this minimum is too low, you must measure to the top mark.

Note - Once the resection is started you cannot enter a different instrument height.

4. Set the Compute station elevation check box and then tap Accept.

Note - For a 2D or planimetric survey, clear the Compute station elevation check box. No elevations is calculated

Warning - Before you continue, tap Options and make sure that the Face order setting is correct.

You cannot change this setting after you start measuring points.

5. Enter the first backsight point name and the target height, if applicable.

When measuring to the bottom notch on a Trimble prism base, tap the advanced pop-up arrow (

) and then select Bottom notch.

Note - In a resection, you can only use backsight points that can be viewed as grid coordinates. This is because the resection calculation is a grid calculation.

If you perform a Resection or Station setup plus while running an Integrated Survey,

you can measure backsight points with GPS. To do this, enter an unknown point name in the point name field. The

Trimble Survey Controller software will then ask if you want to measure the point with GPS using the specified point name. The Measure softkey will show both a prism and a GPS symbol. The Trimble

Survey Controller software will first measure the point with GPS and then perform a measurement with the conventional instrument.

Make sure that you have a site calibration loaded when combining conventional and GPS measurements.

6. Choose an option in the Method field.

7. Sight the target and then tap Measure.

8. Measure further points.

163

Note - To include foresight points during resection, clear the Backsight check box. Foresight points do not contribute to the resection result.

When two measurements have been completed, the Trimble Survey Controller software can provide navigation information for further points, and a Navigate softkey is available. Tap Navigate to navigate to another point.

9. When there is enough data for the Trimble Survey Controller software to calculate a resected position, the Resection residuals screen appears.

Resection - Residuals screen

The Resection residuals screen lists the residuals for each point observed in the resection.

Use the Resection residuals screen to do the following:

•

To observe more points, tap + Point.

•

To view the resection results, tap Close.

•

To store the resection, tap Close and then tap Store.

•

To view/edit the details of a point, highlight the point and then tap Details.

•

To view/edit the residuals of each individual observation to a point, tap the point in the list once.

•

To start measuring rounds of observations to the points, tap End face.

Tips

•

To highlight an item in a list, tap and hold the item for at least half a second.

•

To sort a column in ascending or descending order, tap the column header. Tap the Point column

• header to sort the point in ascending or descending observed order.

To change the residual display view, select an option from the drop-down list in the Residuals screen.

Notes

•

A residual is the difference between the known position and the observed position of the backsight

• point(s).

A foresight point that does not yet exist in the database has null residuals in the Residuals form.

•

You cannot add the same point to a resection more than once. To take further measurements to points

already measured, select End Face. For more information, see Measuring Rounds in Station setup plus or Resection.

Point - Residuals screen

The Point residuals screen lists the residuals for each observation to a point in the resection.

Use the Point residuals screen to do the following:

•

To disable an observation, highlight it and then tap Use.

•

To view the details of an observation, highlight it and then tap Details.

•

To return back to the Resection residuals screen, tap Back.

164

Note - If you have measured face 1 and face 2 observations to a point, turning off the observation for one face will also turn off the observation to the other face.

Warning - If you turn off some (but not all) of the observations to a backsight point, the solution for the resection will be biased because there will be a different number of observations to each backsight point.

Point details screen

The Point details screen shows the mean observation for a point in the resection.

Use the Point details screen to do the following:

• change whether the horizontal component or the vertical component of a point will be used in the

• resection calculation change the target height and/or prism constant for all observations to that point

Note - You can only change which components of a point will be used in the resection calculation if you have selected the compute station elevation option, and the observed point has a 3D grid position.

The Used for field shows the point components used in the resection calculation. See the following table.

Option

H (2D)

V (1D)

H,V (3D)

Description

Use only the horizontal values for that point in the calculation

Use only the vertical values for that point in the calculation

Use both the horizontal and vertical values for that point in the calculation

Resection results screen

The Resection results screen shows information about the resection solution.

Use the Resection results screen to do the following:

•

To return to the Resection residuals screen, tap Esc.

•

To store the resection, tap Store.

Note - During a resection, nothing is stored in the job until you tap Store in the Results screen.

Resection is complete.

Eccentric station setup

You can use the resection function to perform an eccentric station setup, where the station setup is performed in view of a close-by control point and in view of at least one backsight point. For example, use this setup if you cannot set up over the control point, or you cannot see any backsight points from the control point.

165

An eccentric station setup needs at least one angles and distance observation to a close-by control point, and one angles-only observation to a backsight point. Additional backsight points can also be observed during an eccentric station setup. You can measure backsight points with angles-only observations or with angles and distance observations.

For more information, see:

•

Measuring Rounds in Station setup plus or Resection

•

•

Conventional Surveys

•

Set the corrections associated with the instrument.

•

Traverse

Refline

Refline is the process of establishing the position of an occupied point relative to a baseline. To perform a refline station establishment, take measurements to two known or unknown baseline definition points. Once this occupation point is defined, all subsequent points are stored in terms of the baseline using station and offset. This method is often used when setting out buildings parallel to other objects or boundaries.

To perform a Refline station setup:

1. From the main menu, select Survey / Refline.

If the Corrections form does not appear, tap Options and then select the Show corrections on startup check box.

3. Enter an Instrument point name and Instrument height, if applicable.

Trimble Survey Controller corrects this measured slope value to true vertical and adds the offset 0.158

m (0.518 sft) to calculate true vertical to the trunnion axis.

Note - If you select Bottom notch, the minimum slope distance (Hm) that you can enter is 0.300

meters. This is approximately the minimum slope distance that can be physically measured. If this minimum is too low, you must measure to the top mark.

4. Tap Accept.

5. Enter the Point 1 name, and Target height.

•

If point 1 has known coordinates, the coordinates are displayed.

•

If point 1 does not have known coordinates, default coordinates are used. Select Options to change the default coordinates.

166

6. Tap Meas 1 to measure the first point.

7. Enter the Point 2 name, and Target height.

•

If point 1 has known coordinates, a point with known coordinates can be used for point 2.

•

If point 1 does not have known coordinates then a point with known coordinates can not be used at

• point 2.

If point 1 does not have known coordinates, the default coordinates are used. Select Options to change

• the default coordinates.

If point 1 and point 2 had known coordinates the computed refline azimuth is displayed, otherwise the default azimuth 0° is displayed.

8. Enter a Refline azimuth, if applicable.

9. Tap Meas 2 to measure the second point.

The instrument point coordinates are displayed.

10. Tap Store to complete the refline station establishment.

Once the Refline setup is stored, all subsequent points are stored in terms of the baseline as a station and offset.

Note - In a refline station establishment, you can only use existing points that can be viewed as grid coordinates. This is because the refline calculation is a grid calculation. You can use 2D and 3D grid coordinates to define the baseline.

Measure Rounds

This topic describes how to measure multiple sets (rounds) of observations with a conventional instrument and the Trimble Survey Controller software.

A round can consist of one of the following:

• a set of single face 1 observations

• multiple sets of single face 1 observations

• a set of matched face 1 and face 2 observations

• multiple sets of matched face 1 and face 2 observations

Rounds can be used in a number of different ways depending on your equipment, the accessibility of points, and the procedures to observe the points, such as the order in which the observations are made.

With a Trimble S8 Total Station, you can use FineLock mode when measuring to a prism that is more than 20

m away.

To measure rounds of observations:

From the main menu, select Survey and then perform a station setup

, or

167

Manually build the rounds list by observing each point to include in the round on the first

2. From the Survey menu, select Measure rounds.

3. Tap Options to

configure

the rounds options.

Before you start measuring points, make sure that the Face order and Sets per point settings are correct. You cannot change these settings after you start measuring points.

4. Do one of the following:

♦

♦ face.

Load a CSV file that contains all the points to include in the rounds.

Note - You can only use the Load CSV option if you are using a Trimble VX/S Series instrument and have the Trimble Survey Controller Engineering option (PN 90100-02,

90100-03) enabled on your controller.

When all observations are complete, Trimble Survey Controller software shows the Standard

deviations screen.

6. If required, tap

Export to save the rounds list as a CSV file for use at another time, or to share with

another controller.

7. Tap Close to save and exit rounds.

Notes

•

When using servo or robotic instruments, check that the instrument has sighted the target accurately.

Manually adjust it if necessary. Some instruments can perform accurate sighting automatically. For

• information on the instrument specifications, refer to the instrument manufacturer's documentation.

If you are using a servo or robotic instrument to measure a known (coordinated) point, tap Turn.

Alternatively, with a servo instrument, set the Servo auto turn field in the survey style to HA & VA, or

•

HA only to automatically turn the instrument to the point.

If you tap Esc in the Measure screen, the current round is discarded.

•

The top of the Measure rounds screen shows the following:

♦ the current face observations

♦ when you use more than one set per point, the number of the current set and the total number

♦ of sets to be measured (shown in brackets) the number of the current round the total number of rounds to be measured (shown in brackets)

For example, "Face 1 (2/2) (1/3)" shows that the instrument is on face 1 of the second set of two sets and the first of three rounds.

Building the rounds list manually

When you manually build the rounds list, the Trimble Survey Controller software automatically adds each point to the internal rounds list as it is measured for the first time. The rounds list contains all the information about each point such as point name, code, target height, prism constant, and target ID.

To manually add a point to the rounds list, and then measure rounds:

1. Choose to include or exclude the backsight observation.

Station setup plus, Resection, and Rounds Options

There are up to four main settings that control the order in which the observations are taken, and how many observations are made during Station setup plus, Resection, and Rounds:

•

Face order

•

Observation order

•

Sets per point

174

•

Number of rounds

Face order options

•

F1 only - observations are taken only on face 1

•

F1... F2... - all face 1 observations are taken to all points and then all face 2 observations are taken to

• all points

F1/F2... - face 1 and then face 2 observations are taken to the first point, face 1 and then face 2 observations are taken to the next point, and so on

Observation order options

•

123.. 123

•

123.. 321

When the Face order is set to F1... F2... :

•

123.. 123 - observations on face 2 are taken in the same order as the observations on face 1

•

123.. 321 - observations on face 2 are taken in the reverse order to the observations on face 1

When the Face order is set to F1 only or F1/F2 :

•

123.. 123 - each round of observations is taken in the same order

•

123.. 321 - every alternate round of observations is taken in the oposite order

Sets per point option

This option can be used to measure multiple sets of face 1 observations, or face 1 and face 2 observations to a point per round of observations.

If Face order is set to collect F1 and F2 observations, the Sets per point was set to 3, and the Number of

rounds was set to 1, then the total number of observations to each point would be; 2 x 3 x 1 = 6. Setting the

Sets per point option to a number greater than 1 enables you to collect more than one set of observations to a point with only one visit to that location.

This option is currently available only in rounds.

Note - Before using this option please make sure this data collection technique matches your QA/QC requirements.

Number of rounds option

This option controls the number of complete rounds of observations that are are taken to each point.

Skipping Observations

When using Automate rounds you can configure the software to automatically skip obstructed foresight targets.

175

If the instrument cannot measure the point and Skip obstructed foresights is enabled, it skips that point and moves onto the next point in the rounds list.

If the instrument cannot measure the point and Skip obstructed foresights is disabled, a message appears after

60 seconds to indicate that the prism is obstructed.

The Trimble Survey Controller software continues to try to measure to the target until instructed to skip the point. To do this, tap Ok for the obstructed prism message, tap Pause and then tap Skip.

When the Trimble Survey Controller software reaches the end of a rounds list in which points have been skipped, the following message appears:

Observe skipped points?

Tap Yes to observe the points that were skipped during that round. The observations can be skipped again if required. Tap No to end the round.

If a point is skipped in one round, all subsequent rounds continue to prompt for observations to that point.

Trimble Survey Controller software.

Backsight observations cannot be skipped using the Skip obstructed foresights option.

Automate rounds

The Automate rounds option is available for Trimble VX/S Series and 5600 instruments. When you select

Automate rounds, the instrument automatically completes all rounds after the rounds list has been built.

If a target has been blocked, the instrument tries to measure the point for up to 60 seconds. After 60 seconds has elapsed it skips the observation and moves to the next point in the rounds list.

For example, to measure three rounds automatically, and then measure another three rounds:

1. Enter 3 in the Number of rounds field.

2. Once the instrument has measured 3 rounds, enter 6 in the Number of rounds field.

3. Tap + Round. The instrument measures the second group of 3 rounds.

Note - Manually observed targets are automatically paused.

Monitoring

176

When Automated rounds is enabled, monitoring controls are also enabled. Enter a value for the time delay between automated rounds.

With a Trimble 5600 instrument, you can automatically measure to non-active targets. To do this, select the

Auto-measure passive targets check box.

Note - If you select the Auto-measure passive targets check box, manually observed targets are automatically measured rather than paused. If you clear this check box, the software prompts you to aim the instrument to non-active targets.

Continuous topo - Conventional

Use the Continuous topo function to measure points continuously.

A point is stored when one of the following conditions occurs:

• a predefined time has elapsed

• a predefined distance has been exceeded

• both predefined time and/or distance settings have been met

• a predefined stop time and distance settings have been met

To measure Continuous topo points:

From the main menu, select Survey and then perform a station setup

, or

From the main menu, select Survey and then perform a station setup

2. From the main menu, select Survey / Continuous topo.

3. Enter a value in the Start point name field. This increments automatically.

4. Enter a value in the Target height field.

5. In the Method field, select Fixed distance, Fixed time, Time and distance, or Time or Distance.

6. Enter a value in the Distance field and/or the Time interval field, depending on which method you are using.

7. Tap Start to start recording data and then move along the feature to be surveyed.

8. To stop measuring continuous points, tap End.

Tip - To store a position before the predefined conditions have been met, tap Store.

Synchronous and non-synchronous angles and distances

Continuous topo with a Trimble VX/S Series instrument uses only synchronous angles and distances.

When using any other instrument with Continuous topo, for example a Trimble 5600 total station, the

Trimble Survey Controller software uses the latest angles and the latest distance when it stores a position. When a synchronized angle and distance is not available (within approximately 1 second) a newer angle may be paired with an older distance. To minimize any potential position error, you may need to slow the prism movement during Continuous topo.

To measure Continuous topo points using the Stop and go method:

177

, or

From the main menu, select Survey and then perform a station setup

2. From the main menu, select Survey / Continuous topo.

3. Enter a value in the Start point name field. This increments automatically.

4. Enter a value in the Target height field.

5. In the Method field select Stop and go.

6. Enter a value in the Stop time field for the period of time the target must be stationary before the instrument starts to measure the point.

The user is deemed to be stationary when their velocity is less than 5 cm/sec.

7. Enter a value in the Distance field for the minimum distance between points.

When you use an instrument that has a tracklight that has been enabled, the tracklight will be disabled for 2 seconds when the measured point has been stored.

Scanning

Surface scanning is an automated direct reflex (DR) measuring process where measurements are automatically stored along a remote surface that you have defined.

Notes

•

The Scanning option is available only when connected to a Trimble VX instrument.

•

Scanning is not available when the Trimble Survey Controller software is connected through

•

Bluetooth wireless technology.

Scanning is not available when the Trimble Survey Controller software is connected through a serial cable connection.

For more details, see:

•

•

•

•

Starting a scan

To perform a scan using Trimble Survey Controller:

, or

Color controls the color

2. From the Survey menu, select Scanning.

3. Define the area for the scan. Use one of the following methods, and see below for preset buttons that you can use.

178

Polygon framing:

1. If is displayed, tap to set the Polygon framing mode.

2. Tap on the video screen to define the first corner of the polygon.

3. Tap again on the video screen to define the second vertex. You must enter at least three vertices to define a polygon scan frame.

4. If required, drag-and-drop the last vertex to move it, or select the vertex and then tap undo (

) to remove it. You can do this only with the last vertex.

Rectangular framing:

1. If is displayed, tap to set the Rectangular framing mode.

2. Tap on the video screen to define the first corner of the scan rectangle.

3. Tap again on the video screen to define the opposite corner of the scan area.

4. If required, drag-and-drop the vertices, or click and drag the sides of the scan frame to resize the scan rectangle.

4. Define the point density for the scan area:

1. Tap scan properties ( ).

2. Define the scan properties. Select one of the following methods:

◊

Horizontal and vertical distance interval at a given distance

◊

Horizontal and vertical angle interval

◊

Total number of points in the scan

◊

Time to complete

3. Enter the parameters to define the scan density.

5. Tap Start.

Notes

•

The camera is not coaxial with the telescope. For accurate framing at close range, define the At

•

distance setting, which helps to draw the scanning frame in the correct position.

The time to complete a scan is an estimate only. Actual scan times will vary depending on the surface

• or object being scanned.

Scan time is increased if there are areas within the scan that will not return an EDM signal. Where

• possible, try to minimise blank space in the scan area.

Defining the scanning grid through distance intervals assumes that the scanning object is a constant

• distance from the instrument. In other cases, the scan points will not constitute an even grid.

When you perform a scan with the Trimble VX through a robotic connection, Trimble recommends that you stay within the range of the radio link to ensure that all necessary data is collected

• successfully. If you lose the radio link, the remainder of the current scan line will be skipped.

You can scan a full 360° horizontally. The vertical range is approximately between 3°36' (4 gon) and

150° (166 gon).

You can use the preset buttons to help you define the scan area.

These preset buttons are available for Polygon framing:

Softkey Function

179

Toggles between rectangular and polygon framing mode.

When selected, the polygon framed area is shaded red.

Deletes the scan frame from the screen. When the 'cross' is grey, the delete function is not available.

Undoes the previous vertex. When the 'arrow' is grey, the undo function is not available.

These preset buttons available for Rectangular framing:

Softkey Function

Toggles between rectangular and polygon framing mode.

Toggles between the current frame and the complement of the current frame. Tap this button to change the horizontal extents of the scan so that the horizontal scan area is the opposite of the original frame; it is the larger part of the horizontal circle. The vertical extents of the scan area do not change.

Toggles between the current frame and the complement of the current frame. Tap this button to change the horizontal extents of the scan so that the horizontal scan area is the original frame; it is the smaller part of the horizontal circle. The vertical extents of the scan area do not change.

Automatically defines a rectangle from the highest to lowest vertical angles in the current horizontal position. To resize the scan frame, drag one of its sides or vertices. This is useful for quick-framing an object (for example, a facade), in front of the instrument.

Automatically defines a large horizontal rectangle through the majority of the horizontal circle. To resize the scan frame, drag one of its sides or vertices. This is useful for quick-framing an object that surounds the instrument.

Deletes the scan frame from the screen. When the 'cross' is grey, the delete function is not available.

Undoes the previous vertex. When the 'arrow' is grey, the undo function is not available.

You can capture the image displayed in the video frame of the scanning window.

Softkey Function

Links to the Scan Properties form where you can define the parameters of the scan. You can define the density of scan points within the frame area by distance intervals, angle intervals, the total number of points, or the scan time.

Controls the brightness of the video image on the controller screen and consequent captured images.

Controls the contrast of the video image on the controller screen and consequent captured images.

Controls the level of white balance in the video image on the controller screen and consequent captured images.

Set the file name. File names are automatically incremented from the start file name.

Set the image size. The image captured is always the same as the video display on screen. Not all image sizes are available at all zoom levels.

Set the compression of the image. The higher the quality of the image, the larger the file size of the captured image.

180

Captures an extra large (XL) image (2048x1536). XL is available only when zoomed to extents 1:1.

Captures a large (L) image (1024x768). L is available only when zoomed out to extents 1:1 and 2:1.

Captures a medium (M) image (512x384). M is available only when zoomed in to 1:1, 2:1, and 4:1.

Captures a small (S) image (256x192). S is available regardless of the zoom level.

Launches the Panorama function where you can automatically capture multiple images for a defined scan frame. Define the Image size and Compression, enable Fixed exposure to fix the exposure to the settings at the time you tap Start, define the Image overlap and then tap Start to begin taking the images.

Tip - The exposure is fixed when you select Start. When using the Panorama function with Fixed

exposure enabled, point the Trimble VX to the location that defines the camera exposure that you want used for all panoramic images and then tap Start.

You can navigate/zoom around the video frame in the scanning window. The navigation controls are as follows.

Softkey Function

+ Zoom in. There are four levels of zoom available in the video window.

Zoom out. There are four levels of zoom available in the video window.

Pan Activate tap-and-move functionality in the video window.

Zoom out to the full extents.

Display point clouds controls the option to display the point cloud over the scan.

Options

of the point cloud.

Point size controls the width of the pixel displayed in the point cloud.

Point cloud color

Color

Cloud color

Show points...

with the color of the clouds they belong to

Station color

Scan color with the color of the stations they belong to with the color of the scans they belong to

Grey scale intensity using the gray scale defined by their intensity

Color coded intensity using the color encoded intensity

Progress information

During a scan, progress information appears in the scanning window. For every point in the scan, a colored square appears on screen.

•

The color of the square indicates the measured distance to the point. A nearby point is red, compared

• to a point further away which is blue.

The brightness of the square indicates the intensity of the returned EDM signal. The brighter the square, the better (more intense) the signal.

181

•

A black square indicates that no measurement was able to be taken at that location.

•

The size of the squares depends upon the number of points in the scan. The smaller the square, the more points in the scan. When the scan is completed, the points will cover the maximum possible area; so a tall, narrow scan area, that does not fit the screen size well, appears with black strips on each side of the drawn scan points.

The status line is updated after each line of the scan has completed. It provides progress information on:

•

The percentage of scan completed.

•

The number of points scanned.

•

The estimated time remaining. This is updated as the scan progresses to reflect the current scan speed and is dependant on the surface of the object in the scan.

While a scan is in progress:

•

You cannot edit scan properties. To view the properties, tap the scan properties button.

•

Other instrument/survey functions are disabled. If you need to access a survey or instrument function

• during a scan, you must pause the scan, perform the operation and then continue the scan.

You cannot access the video window. You must first complete the scan and then close the scanning window.

Ending a scan

When the scan is completed, the Pause / Continue softkey changes to Finish. Tap Finish or Esc to end the scan.

To cancel a scan that is in progress, tap Esc and then tap yes. The scanning record and associated TSF file will still be written if you manually cancel a scan.

Notes

•

Scanned points are not stored in the Trimble Survey Controller job file; they are written to a TSF file

•

that is stored in the current project folder.

You can import the Trimble Survey Controller JOB or JXL file into the Trimble RealWorks Survey software. If associated TSF and JPEG files are stored in the same

project folder

as the JOB or JXL

• file, they are imported at the same time.

To transfer JPEG files from the Trimble CU in the docking station to the office computer, use the

USB-to-Hirose cable.

•

You cannot use the DB9-to-Hirose serial cable to transfer JPEG files.

Once the scan is completed, the name of the scan file, and the scan properties, are stored in the

Trimble Survey Controller job file.

Tips

•

When a scan is completed or cancelled, the last used frame area is retained in the scanning video window. To rescan the same area, edit the scan properties (if required) and then tap Start.

182

Surface Scan

Surface scanning is an automated direct reflex (DR) measuring process where measurements are automatically stored along a remote surface that you have defined.

The Surface scan option is not available when connected to a Trimble VX instrument. Use Scanning when

connected to a Trimble VX instrument.

To perform a surface scan using Trimble Survey Controller:

From the main menu, select Survey and then perform a station setup

, or

stakeout method is set to To the line.

2. From the Survey menu, select Surface scan.

3. Enter the Start point name and code (if necessary).

4. In the Method field, select a measurement method.

5. Define the area for the scan and grid interval.

6. Tap the Trimble functions button and set the EDM measurement method (TRK is fastest).

The total number of points to scan, scan grid dimensions, and estimated scan time are displayed.

Change the scan size, step sizes or EDM measurement method to increase or decrease the number of points and scan time.

7. Tap Start.

To define the scan area, do one of the following:

•

If the point already exists, enter the point name, or use menu arrow to select it from the list.

•

From the pop-up menu in the Top left and Bottom right fields select Fast fix or Measure to measure and store points that define the limits of the search.

Define the scan area with one of the following methods.

HA VA interval - Use this method on complex surfaces when you cannot use a rectangular plane to approximate the surface you are scanning (see the following diagram):

1. Aim to the top left corner of the scan area (1) and measure a point.

2. Aim to the bottom right corner of the scan area (2) and measure another point.

3. Define the angular grid interval, where:

3 is the Horizontal angle

4 is the Vertical angle

183

Tip - To define a Horizontal only scan of a 360° scan area, set the Top left and Bottom right points to the same name, and set the VA interval to null.

Rectangular plane - Use this method on a plane surface where you need a regular grid interval. Trimble

Survey Controller determines the angle of the plane, and uses this and the grid interval to approximate how far to turn the instrument for each subsequent point (see the following diagram):

1. Aim to the first corner of the scan area (1) and measure a point.

2. Aim to the second corner of the scan area (2) and measure another point.

3. Aim to the third point on the opposite side of the plane (3) and measure a point.

4. Define the distance grid interval, where:

4 is the Horizontal distance

5 is the Vertical distance

184

Line and offset - Use this method to define the area to scan from a center line that has equal offsets to the left and right. Trimble Survey Controller defines the surface using horizontal offsets perpendicular to the center line. The software then uses this definition and the station interval to determine approximately how far to turn the instrument for each subsequent point (see the following diagram):

1. Do one of the following:

•

Two point method:

1. Aim to the start point of the center line (1) and measure a point.

2. Aim to the end point of the center line (2) and measure another point. These two points (1 and

2) define the center line.

•

Access the pop-up menu in the Start point field. Change the method and then define the line by a start point with azimuth and length.

2. Define the station interval (3).

3. Define the maximum offset distance (4).

4. Define the offset interval (5).

Trimble Survey Controller scans the center line first, then the points on the right-hand side, and finally the left-hand side.

Note - With all of the above methods, the defined scan area may not exactly fit the grid interval. There may be an area left over along the scan extents that is smaller than the grid interval. If the width of this area is less than one-fifth of the grid interval, the points along this scan area will not be measured. If the width is more than one-fifth of the grid interval, then an extra point is scanned.

Station and offset

The Station and Offset option is available for both GPS and Conventional surveys enabling points to be measured or staked out relative to a line or arc.

1. Select Survey / Station and offset from the Trimble Survey Controller main menu.

2. Select Measure or Stakeout.

3. In the Type field of the Station and offset screen, select the arc or line relative to which you want to measure or stake out.

185

4. Tap Enter. The appropriate stakeout screens appear as follows:

•

Select Station and Offset / Measure relative to a line. The Stakeout line screen appears and the

•

Select Station and Offset / Measure relative to an arc. The Stakeout line screen appears and the

•

stakeout method is set to To the arc.

Select Station and Offset / Stakeout relative to a line. The Stakeout line screen appears and the

•

stakeout method is set to Station/Offset from line.

Select Station and Offset / Stakeout relative to an arc. The Stakeout arc screen appears and the

stakeout method is set to Station/offset from arc.

Averaged Observations

In a conventional survey, use the Averaged observations method to:

• increase the measurement precision with a predefined number of observations

• view the associated measurement standard deviations

To measure a point using the Averaged observations method:

From the main menu, select Survey and then perform a station setup

, or

From the main menu, select Survey and then perform a station setup

2. From the Survey menu, select Measure topo.

3. In the Point name field, enter the name of the point.

4. In the Code field, enter a feature code (optional).

5. Select Averaged observations as the method.

6. Sight the target and tap Measure.

While the instrument is carrying out the measurements, standard deviations are displayed for the horizontal (HA) and vertical (VA) angles, and the slope distance (SD).

7. View the resulting observation data, and the associated standard deviations, in the Store screen.

If acceptable, tap Store.

Note - Use the options available in the Measure topo screen to change the number of observations taken by the instrument using averaged observations.

Angle Offset, H. Angle Offset, and V. Angle Offset

In a conventional survey, there are three angle offset methods that you can use to observe a point that is inaccessible; Angle offset, H. Angle offset, and V. Angle offset.

The Angle offset method holds the horizontal distance from the first observation, and combines this with the horizontal angle and vertical angle from the second observation to create an observation to the offset location.

The V.Angle offset method holds the horizontal distance and horizontal angle from the first observation, and combines this with the vertical angle from the second observation to create an observation to the offset

186

location.

The H.Angle offset method holds the slope distance and vertical angle from the first observation, and combines this with the horizontal angle from the second observation to create an observation to the offset location.

All raw observables from the first and second observations are stored internally in the job file and are available in Custom ASCII Export.

To measure a point using one of the Offset methods:

, or

if you selected the View before storage check box in the survey style, the measurement values appear.

2. From the Survey menu, select Measure topo.

3. In the Point name field, enter the name of the point.

4. In the Code field, enter a feature code (optional).

5. In the Method field, select Angle offset, H. Angle Offset, or V. Angle Offset.

6. You do not need to enter the Target height. The offset measurements are to the offset location and the target height is not used in any computations. To ensure that a target height is not applied to the observation, a target height of 0 (zero) is automatically stored to the Trimble Survey Controller software database.

7. Place the target beside the object to be measured, sight the target and then tap Measure.

The first observation is displayed.

8. Turn to the offset location and then tap Measure. The two observations are combined into one:

•

•

Tap Store to store the point.

if you did not select the View before storage check box, the point is stored automatically.

Note - The observation is stored in the database as raw HA, VA, and SD records.

Distance Offset

In a conventional survey, use this observation method when a point is inaccessible but a horizontal distance from the target point to the object can be measured.

Distance offset allows you to offset in one, two, or three distances in one step.

To measure a point using the Distance offset method:

From the main menu, select Survey and then perform a station setup

, or

Offset directions perspective.

2. From the Survey menu, select Measure topo.

3. In the Point name field, enter the name of the point.

187

4. In the Code field, enter a feature code (optional).

5. In the Method field, select Distance offset.

6. In the Target height field, enter the height of the target.

7. Tap Options, and set the

8. Enter the L/R offset (left or right offset) from the target to the object, if applicable.

9. Enter the In/Out offset from the target to the object, if applicable.

10. Enter the V.Dist offset from the target to the object, if applicable.

Refer to the following diagram for an example where point 5 is measured with the Offset directions set to Instrument perspective :

♦ offset to the left (2) of the target (3)

♦ offset out (4) from the instrument station (1)

♦ offset vertically (6)

11. Tap Measure.

If you selected the View before storage check box in the survey style, the observation adjusted for the offset distance appears. Tap Store to store the point.

If you did not select the View before storage check box, the point is stored automatically.

The Trimble Survey Controller software stores the adjusted horizontal angle, vertical angle, and slope distance in the point record, as well as an offset record with the offset measurement details.

Offset directions

The left and right directions used in Distance offset are dependant on the Offset directions setting.

This setting can be configured from Options.

When looking from the instrument to the object, an object that is offset to the left when the Offset

directions is set to Instrument perspective will be to the left, but when the Offset directions is set to

Target perspective it will be to the right.

When the Offset directions is set to Automatic the offset directions will be with respect to the instrument perspective in a Servo survey, and target perspective in a Robotic survey.

The measurements are editable in Review current job and are always displayed in the perspective in which they were observed. The perspective cannot be changed in review. The measurement is always stored relative to the instrument position.

188

Dual-prism Offset

In a conventional survey, use this measurement method to coordinate a point that cannot be observed directly with a pole in a plumb position.

To measure a point using the dual-prism offset method:

1. As shown in the following diagram, space two prisms (A and B) apart on the range pole. The distance

BC is known.

From the main menu, select Survey and then perform a station setup

, or

From the main menu, select Survey and then perform a station setup

2. From the Survey menu, select Measure topo.

3. In the Point name field, enter the name of the point.

4. In the Code field, enter a feature code (optional).

5. In the Method field, select Dual-prism offset.

6. Complete the fields as required.

7. Take two measurements (tap Measure).

The Trimble Survey Controller software calculates the obscured position (C) and then stores it as a raw HA

VA SD observation.

All raw observations are stored internally in the job file and are available in Custom ASCII Export.

Circular object

In a conventional survey, use this measurement method to calculate the center point of a circular object, such as a water tank or silo. To do this:

, or

For information on configuring an integrated survey rover survey rod see, Integrated Surveys.

2. From the Survey menu, select Measure topo.

3. Use the Circular object method to measure an angle and distance to the front center face of the circular object.

4. Observe an angles only measurement to the side of the circular object.

189

From these two measurements Trimble Survey Controller calculates the center point of the circular object and stores it as a raw HA VA SD observation. The radius is also calculated and stored as a note.

Remote Object

In a conventional survey, if the instrument does not support DR mode, or if you cannot measure a distance, use this method to calculate the height and/or width of a remote object. See the following diagram.

1. Start a conventional survey.

2. Select Measure Topo / Remote object.

3. Measure an angle and distance to the bottom of the remote object (1).

4. Set the method as required.

5. Sight to the Remote point (2).

6. Tap Store to store the observation.

7. To make multiple remote object observations, repeat steps 5 and 6.

Using the first measurement and continuous HA VA angles, Trimble Survey Controller calculates the position of the remote object, showing the width and elevation difference from the base point. The observation to the base of the remote object is stored as an HA, VA, SD. The Remote point is stored as an HA, VA with a computed SD, including the Object height and Object width.

Conventional Instrument - Corrections

You can set the corrections associated with conventional observations.

Note - If you intend to perform a network adjustment in the Trimble Geomatics Office software using data from a conventional survey, make sure that you enter a pressure, temperature and, curvature and refraction correction.

Use the PPM (Parts Per Million) field to specify a PPM correction to be applied to electronic distance measurements. Key in the PPM correction, or enter the pressure and temperature of the surrounding environment and let the Trimble Survey Controller software compute the correction.

190

Note - If you are using a Trimble VX/S Series instrument, the pressure field is set automatically from the sensor in the instrument. To disable this, tap the advanced pop-up arrow and then clear the From instrument check box.

Use the Curvature and refraction field to specify the index of refraction value. This is used to compute the curvature and refraction correction that is applied to vertical angle observations. See the following table for a description of the curvature and refraction options.

Option Description

0.142

for use during the day

0.2

for use at night

None no correction applied

Note - Do not set corrections in both devices. To set them in the Trimble Survey Controller software, make sure the instrument settings are null.

In the following table, the * symbol in a field indicates that the correction at the top of that column is applied.

Note - *' applies only to computed coordinates when a station setup has been defined.

Displayed / Stored data

Status line

HA VA SD (raw)

HA VA SD

Az VA SD

Az HD VD

HA HD VD

Grid delta Grid

Station and offset

DC file (observations)

DC file (reduced coordinates) *

JobXML (observations) -

JobXML (reduced coordinates)

SC Basic

Corrections applied

C+R PPM PC SL Orient Inst ht Tar ht Proj Cor Stn SF NA POC

* * -

* * *

* *

The following table explains the corrections used above.

191

C+R Curvature and Refraction correction.

PPM

Atmospheric Parts Per Million correction

- PPM is calculated from temperature and pressure.

Prism constant correction.

Sea level (ellipsoid) correction.

- this correction is applied only if a fully defined coordinate system definition is being used; the correction is not applied in the Scale factor only definition.

Orient Orientation correction.

Inst ht Instrument height correction.

Tar ht Target height correction.

Proj

Cor

Projection correction.

- this includes the application of a scale factor specified in the Scale factor only definition.

Stn SF

POC

Station setup scale factor.

- in any station setup, a scale factor for this setup can be specified or computed. This scale factor is applied in the reduction of all observations from this station setup.

Neighborhood adjustment.

- in a station setup defined using Station setup plus or Resection, a neighborhood adjustment can be applied. The neighborhood adjustment is computed based on the observed residuals to the control points used during the station setup. The adjustment is applied, using the specified exponent value, in the reduction of all observations from this station setup.

Prism offset correction

- only applied when using a Trimble 360° prism or a Trimble MultiTrack target.

Target Details

You can configure the details of the target during a conventional survey.

When connected to a conventional instrument the Target icon appears in the status bar. The number next to the target icon indicates the target currently in use. To alternate between targets or to edit the target height and

the prism constant,

tap the target icon. To select the target to use, tap the appropriate target in the pop-up list.

You can create up to five non-DR targets.

Tip - To change to a target, select the target name. To edit entries in the Target form, select the target height or prism constant.

Note - If you are using a Trimble VX/S Series instrument, the Pressure field is set automatically from the sensor in the instrument. To disable this, tap the advanced pop-up arrow and then clear the From instrument check box.

When connected to a DR instrument, Target DR is used to define the DR target height and prism constant. To enable DR, select Target DR. To disable DR and return the instrument to its last state, select target 1 - 5.

When measuring to the bottom notch on a Trimble prism base, tap the advanced pop-up arrow ( ) and then select Bottom notch.

192

Trimble Survey Controller corrects this measured slope value to true vertical and adds the offset 0.158 m

(0.518 sft) to calculate the true vertical height to the center of the prism.

Note - If you select Bottom notch, the minimum slope distance (Hm) that you can enter is 0.300 meters. This is approximately the minimum slope distance that can be physically measured. If this minimum is too low, you must measure to the top mark.

For details, see the following figure and table.

0.158m Offset from bottom notch to center of prism.

Hm Measured slope distance.

Hm corrected from slope to true vertical.

True vertical target height. Hc + 0.158m.

To add a new target:

1. Tap the target icon in the status bar and then tap the height or prism constant for Target 1.

2. In the Target 1 screen, tap Add to create Target 2.

3. Enter the details for Target 2 and then tap Accept.

4. Target 2 now becomes the active target.

To delete a target from the list:

1. Tap the target icon in the status bar and then tap the height or prism constant.

2. In the Target screen, tap Delete. The Target is removed from the list.

Note - You can not delete Target 1 or Target DR.

To edit a target height:

1. Tap the target icon in the status bar.

193

2. Tap the target height for the target you want to edit.

3. Edit the target details and then tap Accept.

To edit target heights of observations already stored to the job, do one of the following:

•

For a single observation or multiple observations using the same or different targets, use

Point

•

Manager.

For a single target record, and subsequently a group of observations that use that target, use Review current job.

Target tracking with the Trimble VX/S Series

If you use a Trimble VX/S Series instrument with search capabilities and a Trimble VX/S Series 360° prism or a Trimble MultiTrack target, you can configure the software to use an Active Target ID.

Note - If you use a Trimble VX/S Series instrument with the Trimble MultiTrack target, you must upgrade the instrument to firmware version R7.0.35 or later. The Trimble VX/S Series firmware is available on www.trimble.com.

•

When using the Trimble MultiTrack target, the Tracking mode can be set to Passive or Active. When

• the tracking mode is set to Active, you can configure the Target ID.

When using the Trimble VX/S Series 360° prism, the Target ID can be set to Off, Search, Search and

measure, or Always. When the tracking mode is set to Search, Search and measure, or Always, you can configure the Target ID.

From the following, select the target ID checking method that best suits the equipment you have and the environment that you are working in:

•

Active - the instrument is always locked to the active target.

•

Search - check the ID when a search is initiated.

•

Search and measure - check the ID when a search is initiated, and when a measurement is initiated.

•

Always

- the ID is constantly being checked by the instrument.

Tracking mode - Active

•

If you operate in a highly reflective environment, or on a site with many prisms, set the Tracking

mode to Active to ensure that you maintain constant lock to the correct target.

To do this:

1. Tap the target icon on the status bar.

2. Do one of the following:

•

If available, select the Target ID field.

The Target ID field is available only when you use a Trimble MultiTrack target, and Tracking mode

• is set to Active.

Select the Target height or Prism constant field to open the Target form.

194

3. Set the Prism type to VX/S Series MultiTrack.

4. Set the Tracking mode to Active.

5. Set the Target ID to match the identification number in the Target ID on the robotic rover.

Check the target ID - Search

If you operate in an environment with few reflective surfaces, but you want to ensure that if you do a search you will lock to the correct target, set Check target ID to Search.

To do this:

1. Tap the target icon on the status bar.

2. Do one of the following:

•

If available, select the Target ID field.

The Target ID field is available only when you use an VX/S Series 360° prism, and Check target ID

• is not set to Off.

Select the Target height or Prism constant field to open the Target form.

3. Set the Prism type to VX/S Series 360°.

4. Set the Check target ID to Search.

5. Set the Target ID to match the identification number in the Target ID on the Trimble Standard Rod.

Check the target ID - Search and measure

If you operate in an environment with few reflective surfaces, but you want additional assurance if you do a search or when you measure that you will lock to the correct target, set Check target ID to Search and measure.

To do this:

1. Tap the target icon on the status bar.

2. Do one of the following:

•

If available, select the Target ID field.

The Target ID field is available only when you use an VX/S Series 360° prism, and Check target ID

• is not set to Off.

Select the Target height or Prism constant field to open the Target form.

3. Set the Prism type to VX/S Series 360°.

4. Set the Check target ID to Search and measure.

5. Set the Target ID to match the identification number set in the Target ID on the Trimble Standard

Rod.

Check the target ID - Always

If you operate in a highly reflective environment, or on a site with many prisms, set Check target ID to Always to ensure that you maintain constant lock to the correct target.

195

To do this:

1. Tap the target icon on the status bar.

2. Do one of the following:

•

If available, select the Target ID field.

The Target ID field is available only when you use an VX/S Series 360° prism, and Check target ID

• is not set to Off.

Select the Target height or Prism constant field to open the Target form.

3. Set the Prism type to VX/S Series 360°.

4. Set the Check target ID to Always.

5. Set the Target ID to match the identification number in the Target ID on the robotic rover.

For more information on the different Check target ID modes, see

Target ID - Target tracking with Trimble

VX/S Series.

Remote Measuring Target (RMT) ID - Target tracking with Trimble 5600

When you work on a site with multiple RMTs, configure the RMT channel ID to lock onto a specific RMT target.

This is only available on supported instruments.

To do this:

1. Tap the target icon on the status bar.

2. Select the Target ID field to open the Target screen.

3. Set the RTM ID in the Trimble Survey Controller software to match the ID set in the RMT. For more information, refer to the Trimble 5600 Series User Guide.

Tip - To lock to RMTs that do not support RMT ID, set the RMT ID to 4.

Prism Constant

The prism constant (distance offset) must be set for each prism that is used as a target in a conventional survey.

To edit a prism constant:

1. Tap the target icon in the status bar.

2. Tap the prism constant for the target you want to edit.

3. Edit the prism constant details and then tap Accept.

Enter a negative value if the prism constant is to be subtracted from measured distances. Enter the

Prism constant in millimeters (mm).

When using a Trimble VX/S Series, 5600, or 3600 instrument, all corrections are applied in Trimble Survey

196

Controller.

For some non-Trimble instruments, the Trimble Survey Controller software checks to see if a prism constant has been applied by the instrument and the software. When you select Station setup, status line messages show what has or has not been checked.

If the Trimble Survey Controller software cannot check the setting on the conventional instrument, do one of the following:

•

If there is a prism constant set on the instrument, make sure that the prism constant in the Trimble

•

Survey Controller software is set to 0.000.

If there is a prism constant set in the Trimble Survey Controller software, make sure that the prism constant in the instrument is set to 0.000.

To review or edit the prism constant on previously stored observations, tap Favorites / Review current job or

tap Files / Point manager. For more information, see Point Manager.

Measuring a Point in Two Faces

To start a conventional survey in the Trimble Survey Controller software, you must first perform a Station

setup using one of the following methods:

•

•

•

•

You can observe points using face 1 (direct) and face 2 (reverse) measurements during a station setup and

during Measure rounds

Measure topo.

Consider the station setup and the new point measurement method together and choose which to use according to how you want to capture and store the data.

If you only want to use a single backsight (measured on one or both faces), and measure some topo points (on one or both faces), then use Station setup and Measure topo. When you measure on both faces, remember to also measure the backsight on face 2 in Measure topo. Otherwise, all foresights on face 2 will be oriented using the face 1 backsight observation.

If you want to measure multiple backsights, measure multiple rounds, or obtain better quality control of your observations, see below for more information on different station setup and new point measurement methods in Trimble Survey Controller.

Use Station setup plus to:

• measure a single backsight point or multiple backsight points

• measure backsight and foresight points

197

• pair the face 1 and face 2 observations and create MTA records

• measure face 1 only observations and create MTA records

• measure one or more rounds of observations

• review the quality of the observations and remove bad observations

Use Resection to:

• coordinate the instrument point

• measure multiple backsight points

• measure backsight and foresight points

• pair the face 1 and face 2 observations and create MTA records

• measure face 1 only observations and create MTA records

• measure one or more rounds of observations

• review the quality of the observations and remove bad observations

Use Station setup to:

• perform a station setup with a single backsight measurement on one face only

Notes

•

When measuring points on both faces, use Measure topo to observe the backsight on the other face.

•

Alternatively, use Measure rounds and include the observation to the backsight point in the rounds.

When you make topo observations after a Station setup, and you subsequently select Measure rounds, you must reobserve the backsight to include it in the rounds, generate an MTA to the backsight, and

• calculate turned angles from the backsight MTA for all foresight points.

MTAs are not created during Station setup, but are created later if you make further observations to the backsight using Measure topo or Measure rounds.

Use Measure rounds (after performing a station setup) to:

• measure one or more foresight points

• pair the face 1 and face 2 observations and create MTA records

• measure face 1 only observations and create MTA records

• measure one or more

sets of observations per point

in one round

• measure one or more rounds of observations

• review the standard deviations of the observations and remove bad observations

Notes

•

Standard deviations are only available after the second round of observations.

•

If the station setup has a single backsight (from Station setup or Station setup plus), you can choose

• whether or not to include the backsight point in the rounds list.

If the station setup has multiple backsights (from Station setup plus or Resection), the backsight points

• are not included in the rounds list.

If you do not measure the backsight on face 2, then the horizontal angle face 2 measurements that were observed using Measure rounds will not be used when calculating the MTAs.

198

•

When you use Measure rounds after a station setup with a single backsight, and you do not include the backsight point in the rounds list, all turned angles are calculated using the backsight observation(s) made during the station setup.

Use Measure topo (after performing a station setup) to:

• measure face 1 or face 2 observations and create MTA records

Note - You can measure multiple rounds using Measure topo. However, Trimble recommends Measure

rounds as a more suitable method to use.

Additional notes about MTA records

•

When you use Station setup plus or Resection, all observations are stored when the station setup is complete. When you use Measure rounds, the observations are stored at the end of each round. In all

• three options, the MTAs are stored at the end.

When you use Measure topo, MTAs are calculated and stored on the fly.

•

You can create MTAs during a station setup using Station setup plus and Resection, and also after a station setup using Measure rounds or Measure topo. When you measure the same point(s) using

Measure rounds or Measure topo after Station setup plus and Resection, the Trimble Survey

Controller software may produce two MTAs for the one point. When more than one MTA exists for the same point in one station setup, the Trimble Survey Controller software always uses the first

•

MTA. To avoid having two MTAs for the same point, do not use both methods to measure a point.

Once an MTA record is written to the job database, you cannot change it.

•

You can delete a face 1 and face 2 observation but the MTA records are not updated.

•

You cannot delete MTA records in review.

•

In Station setup plus, Resection, or Measure rounds, when you use the F1... F2 or F1/F2... face order,

•

MTAs that are created pair face 1 and face 2 observations.

In Station setup plus, Resection, or Measure rounds, when you use the F1 only face order, MTAs that

• are created group face 1 observations.

In Measure topo, MTAs that are created group together all observations for the same point.

GDM CU Programs

Trimble Survey Controller offers similar functionality to the GDM Control Unit.

To access GDM CU programs, use the Trimble function key as you would the PRG key on the GDM CU.

The following table shows where to find specific GDM CU programs within Trimble Survey Controller.

GDM CU programs in Trimble Survey Controller

Trimble Survey Controller

GDM CU program

Select ...

to ...

Shortcut

( + number)

199

20 - Station setup

21 - Z/IZ

22 - Angle measurement

23 - Set Out

24 - Refline

25 - Area

Calculation

26 - Distob

27 - Moving

Coordinates

Forward

29 - Roadline

30 - Measure

Coordinates

32 - Angle measurement plus

Survey / Station setup perform a known station setup.

Survey / Station setup plus

Survey / Resection perform a known station plus setup.

perform a free station or eccentric station setup.

Survey / Refline perform an instrument setup relative to a known or unknown baseline

Survey / Station elevation

Survey / Measure rounds calculate an instrument elevation measure one or more Face 1 (CI) and Face 2 (CII) measurements.

Survey / Measure topo measure individual Face 1 and/or Face 2 measurements. 30

Survey / Stakeout /

Points set out points with known coordinates. Points can be defined via Keyin / Points or obtained from a linked

CSV, TXT or Trimble Survey Controller JOB file.

Survey / Station and

Offset measure or set out relative to a line, arc, or road. The line, arc, or road can be defined through Keyin / Line,

Keyin / Arc, or Keyin / Road, or imported to the Trimble

Survey Controller job.

COGO / Compute area

COGO / Compute inverse calculate an area.

calculate an inverse between two points.

26 the Trimble Survey Controller software stores raw data and automatically calculates point coordinates.

There is no specific program required in the Trimble Survey Controller software 27 to move coordinates forward. Instead, select Station setup plus or Measure rounds.

28 - Obstructed

Point

Survey / Measure topo and set the method to Dual-prism offset. 28

Survey / Stakeout /

Roads measure or set out relative to a road. Roads are defined by strings or by horizontal alignments, vertical alignments, and templates defining cross sections.

29 the Trimble Survey Controller software stores raw data and automatically calculates point coordinates.

There is no specific program required in the Trimble Survey Controller software to measure coordinates. Instead, use Measure topo.

Points can be exported to a CSV or TXT file, through Files / Import/Export /

Send data to another device, for use as a control file. To access the control file from another job, select the CSV, TXT, or JOB file as a linked file through

Files / Properties of current job.

32 Survey / Measure rounds

Survey / Measure

rounds / Options measure one or more Face 1 (CI) and Face 2 (CII) measurements.

configure the number of rounds to be measured; select automatic measurements; set the observation order;

200

measure distances on Face 2(CII); define a time interval between rounds (automatic measurements only).

33 - Robotic

Lite

Not supported -

39 - Roadline

Survey / Stakeout /

Roads measure or set out relative to a road. Roads are defined by strings or horizontal alignments, vertical alignments, and templates defining cross sections.

43 - Enter coordinates

Keyin / Points enter the coordinates for a point.

45 - Pcode

Configuration /

Feature and attribute libraries create a feature library with codes. To create a full feature and attribute library, or a feature and attribute library with both codes and attributes, use Feature and

Attribute Editor or Autodraft Configuration File Editor.

You can then transfer the feature and attribute library to the controller.

60 - Athletics Not Supported -

61 - COGO

65 - Direct

Reflex

COGO / Compute point perform similar coordinate calculations.

COGO / Compute point perform a From a baseline (Corner + distance),

Brng-Line intersect (Corner + angle), or Four point intersection (Two lines intersection) measurement.

Survey / Measure topo perform a Circular Object (Eccentric object) measurement.

Survey / Surface scan perform a surface scan.

66 - Monitoring

Menu 2

(View/Edit)

Survey / Measure rounds

Survey / Measure rounds / Options

Files / Review current job

Favorites / Review

Favorites / Point manager configure the number of rounds to be measured, automatically store points, and define a time interval between rounds.

review and edit the data stored in the job.

F 6 (Change target height)

F 33 (Change prism constant)

Edit target height or Prism constant

GDM Job Files export the target icon on the status bar

Favorites / Review current job

Favorites / Point manager quickly change the target details for new observations.

edit the target record to change the target height or prism constant.

Changes then apply to all observations that use that target.

use Point manager to edit the height or prism constant values for individual observations

For more information, refer to the Help.

Trimble Data Transfer

(connected to Trimble

Survey Controller) transfer the GDM Job file.

For more information about transferring data, see Transferring

Files between the Controller and the Office Computer.

201

Files / Import/Export /

Export custom format files create a GDM Job file

Advanced Geodetic Support

Tap Configuration / Options to enable the following options in Advanced Geodetic support:

•

Station setup scale factor

•

Helmert transformation for Resection

Station setup scale factor

When you turn on Advanced Geodetic support, you can apply an additional scale factor to every conventional station setup. All measured horizontal distances are adjusted by this scale factor. To configure the scale factor

settings, select Options during a Station setup

, Station setup plus , or

Resection.

This station setup scale factor can be Free (computed) or Fixed. If you have chosen to compute a station setup scale factor, you must observe at least one distance to a backsight during the station setup so that a scale factor can be calculated.

Helmert transformation for Resection

When you turn on Advanced Geodetic support, Resection has an additional computation method called

Helmert transformation. To perform a resection using a Helmert transformation, select Options during a

Resection, and then set the Resection type to Helmert.

Note - The standard resection type is the same as the resection method used when Advanced Geodetics is turned off.

For a Helmert transformation, you must measure distances to the backsight points. The resection calculation will not use a backsight point without a distance measurement.

For more information, see Neighborhood Adjustment.

Angles and distance

In a conventional survey, use this measurement method to measure a point by angles and a distance.

Angles only and H.Angle only

In a conventional survey, use this measurement method to measure a point by both a horizontal and vertical angle or by a horizontal angle only.

202

Survey - Calibration

Calibration

A calibration calculates parameters for transforming WGS-84 coordinates into local grid coordinates (NEE).

It either calculates a horizontal

and vertical

adjustment, or a transverse mercator projection and a 3-parameter datum transformation, depending on what has already been defined.

For accurate calibration, your site should be within at least four control points with known 3-D grid coordinates.

Warning - You must complete a calibration before you compute offset or intersection points, or stake out points. If you change the calibration after computing or staking out these points, they will not be consistent with the new coordinate system and any points computed or staked out after the change.

To calibrate point coordinates:

1. Enter the grid coordinates of your control points. Key these in, transfer them from your office computer, or measure them using a conventional total station.

2. Measure the points with GPS.

3. Perform either an

automatic or a

manual calibration.

4. To obtain the current list of points being used in the calibration, select Survey / Site calibration.

Notes and Recommendations

•

You can perform a calibration using one of the real-time GPS survey styles in the Trimble Survey

Controller software. Do this manually, or let the Trimble Survey Controller software do it automatically. If all the points have been measured, you do not need to connect the Trimble controller

• to a receiver during a manual calibration.

Multiple calibrations can be performed in one job. The last calibration performed and applied is used

• to convert the coordinates of all previously surveyed points in the database.

You can use up to 20 points for a calibration. Trimble strongly recommends that you use a minimum of four 3D local grid coordinates (N, E, E) and four observed WGS84 coordinates, with the local projection and datum transformation parameters (the coordinate system). This should provide enough redundancy.

Note - You can use a combination of 1D, 2D, and 3D local grid coordinates. If no projection and no datum transformation are defined, you must have at least one 2D grid point.

If you did not specify the coordinate system, the Trimble Survey Controller software calculates a

Transverse Mercator projection and a three-parameter datum transformation.

•

Use the Trimble Geomatics Office software, Trimble's Data Transfer utility, or ASCII transfer to

• transfer control points.

Be careful when naming points that are to be used in a calibration. Before you begin, familiarize yourself with the

Database search rules.

203

•

The set of WGS-84 coordinates must be independent of the set of grid coordinates.

•

You select the grid coordinates. Select the vertical coordinates (elevation), the horizontal coordinates

•

(northing and easting values), or all of these together.

Place the calibration points around the perimeter of the site. Do not survey outside of the area

• enclosed by the calibration points, as the calibration is not valid beyond this perimeter.

The origin of the horizontal adjustment is the first point in the calibration.

•

The origin of the vertical adjustment is the first point in the calibration with an elevation.

When reviewing a calibration point in the database, notice that the WGS84 values are the measured coordinates. The grid values are derived from these, using the current calibration.

The original keyed-in coordinates remain unchanged. (They are stored elsewhere in the database as a

• point with the Type field showing Keyed in coordinates and the Stored as field showing Grid. )

When you are calibrating a no projection, no datum job, (where ground coordinates are required after calibration) you must define the project height (average site height). When the job is calibrated, the project height is used to compute a ground scale factor for the projection, using the inverse of the

• ellipsoid correction.

When you start a Scale Factor Only job and then introduce GPS data, you must perform a site calibration to relate the GPS data to the Scale Factor Only point coordinates.

When you select Site Calibration, you must specify whether the Scale Factor Only coordinates in the job represent grid coordinates or ground coordinates. The site calibration computations then set up a grid coordinate system or a ground-based coordinate system, that best fits the existing data in the job to the GPS data.

Configuring the Survey Style for a Site Calibration

A calibration calculates parameters for transforming WGS-84 coordinates into local grid coordinates (NEE).

Set the parameters for computing a calibration when you create or edit a Survey Style.

To set the parameters for computing a calibration, select the Site calibration survey style option from

Configuration / Survey styles, selecting a real time survey, and do the following:

1. The Fix H. scale field to 1.0: check box details whether the calibration computation should compute a horizontal scale factor or not:

♦

To compute the horizontal scale factor, make sure the check box is clear. (This is the default setting.) Use this option only if GPS measurements need to be scaled to fit the local control.

♦

(GPS measurements are usually more precise.)

To fix the horizontal scale factor to 1.0, select the check box. Select the check box to avoid distorting the geometry of the GPS network, but note that the calibration residuals will be higher.

2. Select an observation type appropriate to a calibration point. The options for a calibration point are

Topo point or Observed control point.

3. For the Trimble Survey Controller software to automatically perform a calibration when you measure a calibration point, select the Auto calibrate check box. To switch automatic calibration off, clear the check box.

4. If necessary, set the tolerances for maximum horizontal and vertical residuals, and maximum and

204

minimum horizontal scale settings. These settings only apply to automatic calibration and do not affect manual calibration.

You can also specify the maximum slope of the vertical adjustment plane. The Trimble Survey

Controller software warns you if the slope in the north direction or the slope in the east direction exceeds this. Generally the default settings are appropriate.

5. Specify how the calibration points you measure will be named:

♦

In the Method field, choose one of the following options: Add prefix, Add suffix, or Add

♦ constant.

In the Add field, enter the prefix, suffix, or constant.

The table below shows the different options and gives an example of each.

Example value in the

Add field

Grid point name

Calibration point name

Option

Same

Add prefix

Add suffix

What the software does

Gives the calibration point the same name as the grid point

Inserts a prefix before the grid point name

Inserts a suffix after the grid point name

Add constant Adds a value to the grid point name

GPS_

_GPS

100

GPS_100

100_GPS

10 100 110

For more information, see:

•

Calibration

•

Calibration - Automatic

•

Calibration - Manual

Key in the grid coordinates of your control points. Alternatively, transfer them from your office computer, or use a conventional instrument to measure them. Then measure the points with GPS.

To carry out a manual calculation:

1. From the main menu, select Survey / Site calibration.

2. For Scale factor only jobs:

♦

If the job uses ground coordinates, select Ground.

♦

If the job uses grid coordinates, select Grid.

3. Use Add to add a point to the calibration.

4. Enter the name of the grid point and the WGS-84 point in the appropriate fields.

The two point names do not have to be the same, but they should correspond to the same physical

205

point.

5. Change the Use field as required and tap Accept.

The residuals for each point are not displayed until at least three 3D points are included in the calibration to provide redundancy.

6. Tap Results to see the horizontal and vertical shifts that the calibration has calculated.

7. To add more points, tap Esc to return to the calibration screen.

8. Repeat steps 3 through 6 until all the points are added.

9. Do one of the following:

♦

If the residuals are acceptable, tap Apply to store the calibration.

♦

If the residuals are not acceptable, recalculate the calibration.

Recalculating a Calibration

Recalculate a calibration if the residuals are not acceptable, or if you want to add or delete points.

To recalculate a calibration:

1. From the Survey menu, choose Site calibration.

2. Do one of the following:

♦

To remove (exclude) a point, highlight the point name and then tap Delete.

♦

To add a point, tap Add.

♦

To change the components used for a point, highlight the point name and tap Edit. In the Use field, choose whether to use the vertical coordinate of the grid point, the horizontal coordinates, or both horizontal and vertical coordinates.

3. Tap Apply to apply the new calibration.

Note - Each calibration calculation is independent of the previous one. When a new calibration is applied, it overwrites any previously calculated calibration.

Calibration - Automatic

When you use this function to measure calibration points, the calibration calculations are performed and stored automatically.

Define a projection and datum transformation. Otherwise, a transverse mercator projection will be used and the datum will be WGS-84.

To use automatic calibration:

1. Select your RTK Survey Style.

2. Select Site calibration.

3. Select the Auto calibrate check box. Alternatively, tap Options when you measure a Calibration point.

206

4. Use Options to configure the naming relationship between the grid and WGS-84 points.

5. Enter the grid coordinates of your Calibration points. Key these in, transfer them from your office computer, or measure them using a conventional total station.

For keyed in coordinates check that the coordinate fields are North, East, and Elevation. If they are not, tap Options and change the Coordinate view to Grid. Key in the known grid coordinates and tap

Enter.

Select the Control point check box. (This ensures that the point is not overwritten by a measured point.)

For transferred coordinates make sure that these coordinates are:

♦ transferred as grid coordinates (N, E, E), not as WGS84 coordinates (L, L, H)

♦ control class points

6. Measure each point as a Calibration point.

In the Method field, select Calibration point.

7. Enter the grid point name. The Trimble Survey Controller software names the GPS point automatically, using the naming relationship that you configured earlier. The Auto-calibrate function then matches the points (grid and WGS-84 values), and calculates and stores the calibration. The calibration is applied to all previously measured points in the database.

8. When you measure the next Calibration point, a new calibration is calculated using all of the

Calibration points. It is stored and applied to all previously measured points.

When one point has been calibrated, or a projection and datum transformation have been defined, the

Find softkey appears. You can use this to navigate to the next point.

The calibration residuals are only displayed if the calibration tolerances are exceeded.

If this happens, consider removing the point with the most extreme residuals. Do one of the following:

•

If at least four points are left after removing that point, recalibrate using the remaining points.

•

If not enough points are left after removing that point, measure it again and recalibrate.

It may be necessary to remove (re-measure) more than one point. To remove a point from the calibration calculations:

1. Highlight the point name and tap Enter.

2. In the Use field, select Off and tap Enter. The calibration is recalculated and the new residuals are displayed.

3. Tap Apply to accept the calibration.

To view the results of an automatic calibration:

1. From the Survey menu, choose Site calibration. The Site calibration screen appears.

207

2. Tap Results to see the Calibration results.

To change a calibration that has been calculated using the Auto calibrate function, select Site calibration from the Survey menu. Then proceed as described in

Performing a Manual Site Calibration

208

Survey - GPS

Starting the Base Receiver

This chapter describes how to start the base receiver for a GPS survey.

For more information, go directly to these topics in this section:

Base Station Coordinates

Setting up the Equipment for a Real-Time Survey

Setting up the Equipment for a Postprocessed Survey

Setting up the Equipment for a Real-Time and Postprocessed Survey

Starting a Base Survey

Starting a Trimble 4000 SSe/SSi Base

Ending a Base Survey

Radios for GPS Surveys

Base Station Coordinates

When you set up a base, it is important to know the WGS84 coordinates of the point as accurately as possible.

Note - Every 10 m of error in a base station coordinate can introduce up to 1 ppm scale error on every measured baseline.

The following recognized methods, listed in descending order of accuracy, are used to determine base station

WGS-84 coordinates:

•

Published or precisely-determined coordinates.

•

Coordinates computed from published or precisely-determined grid coordinates.

•

Coordinates derived using a reliable differential (RTCM) broadcast based on published or

• precisely-determined coordinates.

A WAAS or EGNOS position generated by the receiver. Use this method if no control exists for the

• location and you have a receiver that tracks WAAS/EGNOS satellites.

An autonomous position generated by the receiver-use this method for real-time surveys in a location where no control exists. Trimble strongly recommends that you calibrate any jobs started by this method on a minimum of four local control points.

Tip - In the U.S.A., you can regard NAD83 geodetic coordinates as equivalent to WGS-84 coordinates.

209

Note - If the keyed in WGS-84 coordinates differ from the current autonomous position generated by the receiver by more than 300 m, a warning message appears.

For more information about entering base station coordinates, see Starting a Base Survey.

Survey Integrity

To preserve the integrity of a GPS survey, consider the following:

•

When you start subsequent base receivers for a particular job, make sure that each new base coordinate is in the same terms as the initial base coordinate.

Note - Within a job, only use an autonomous position to start the first base receiver. An autonomous position is equivalent to an assumed coordinate in conventional surveying.

•

Coordinates published by a reliable source and coordinates determined by control surveys should be

• in the same system.

If subsequent base coordinates are not in the same terms, regard observations from each base as a

• separate job. Each needs a separate calibration.

Because measured real-time kinematic points are stored as vectors from the base station, not as absolute positions, the origin of the survey must be an absolute WGS-84 position from which the vectors radiate.

If other base stations are subsequently set up on points measured from the original base station, all

• vectors are resolved back to the original base station.

It is possible to start the base on any kind of coordinates, for example, grid or local ellipsoid coordinates. However, in a realtime survey, the Trimble Survey Controller software must store a

WGS-84 position for the base when a rover survey is started. It is this position that is held fixed as the origin of the network.

When you start a rover survey, the Trimble Survey Controller software compares the WGS-84 position broadcast by the base receiver with points already in the database. If a broadcast point has the same name as a point in the database, but different coordinates, the Trimble Survey Controller software uses the coordinates that are in the database. These coordinates were keyed in or transferred by you, so it assumes that you want to use them.

If a point in the database has the same name as the one being broadcast by the base, but the coordinates are NEE or local LLH rather than WGS-84 coordinates, the Trimble Survey Controller software converts this point to WGS-84 coordinates using the current datum transformation and projection. It then uses these as the base coordinates. If no datum transformation and projection are defined, the broadcast WGS-84 point is automatically stored and used as the base.

The following diagram shows a survey using two base stations.

210

In this survey, Base station 2 was first surveyed as a roving point from Base station 1.

Note - Base stations 1 and 2 must be linked together by a measured baseline, and Base station 2 must be started with the same name that it had when it was surveyed as a roving point from Base station 1.

Setting up the Equipment for a Real-Time Survey

This section describes how to assemble the hardware components at the base receiver for a Real-time kinematic (RTK) or Real-time differential (RT differential) survey. Follow these steps if you are using a

Trimble R7 or 5700 GPS receiver.

Using a Trimble R7 or 5700 GPS Receiver

To set up a base receiver for a real-time survey using a Trimble R7 or 5700 GPS receiver:

1. Set the Zephyr antenna over the ground mark using a tripod, a tribrach, and a tribrach adaptor.

2. Use the tripod clip (part number 43961) to hang the Trimble R7 or 5700 GPS receiver on the tripod.

3. Connect the Zephyr antenna to the yellow GPS receiver port labeled "GPS". Use the yellow GPS antenna cable (part number 41300-10).

Note - Instead of hanging the receiver on the tripod, you can place the receiver in its base case. Run the antenna cable out of the portal in the side of the base case to the antenna so that the case can stay closed while the receiver is running.

4. Assemble and erect the radio antenna.

5. Connect the radio antenna to the radio using the cable attached to the antenna.

6. Connect the radio to the GPS receiver port 3.

211

♦

If using a Trimble radio, use the supplied cable.

♦

If using a radio provided by a third party, use the appropriate cable.

Note - For some third-party radios, a separate power supply is needed for the radio.

Warning - Do not force plugs into the receiver ports. Align the red dot on the plug with the red line on the socket and then insert the plug carefully.

7. If external power is required, connect the power supply with a 0-shell Lemo connection to port 2 or port 3 on the receiver.

8. Connect the controller to the GPS receiver port 1 using the 0-shell Lemo-to-Hirose cable.

Turn on the controller, then follow the instructions in Starting a Base Survey.

The following diagram shows how to set up the base receiver for a real-time survey using a Trimble R7 or

5700 GPS receiver.

Setting up the Equipment for a Postprocessed Survey

This section shows how to assemble the hardware components at the base receiver for a postprocessed kinematic, a postprocessed differential or a FastStatic survey.

212

Using a Trimble R7 or 5700 GPS Receiver

To set up the base receiver for a postprocessed survey using a Trimble R7 or 5700 GPS receiver. For more information, see the

diagram on setting up the base receiver. Then do the following:

1. Set the Zephyr antenna over the ground mark using a tripod, a tribrach, and a tribrach adaptor.

2. Use the tripod clip (Part Number 43961) to hang the Trimble R7 or 5700 GPS receiver on the tripod.

3. Connect the Zephyr antenna to the yellow GPS receiver port labeled GPS. Use the yellow GPS antenna cable (part number 41300-10).

Warning - Do not force plugs into the receiver ports. Align the red dot on the plug with the red line on the socket and then insert the plug carefully.

7. If external power is required, connect the power supply with a 0-shell Lemo connection to Port 2 or

Port 3 on the receiver.

8. Connect the controller to the GPS receiver port 1 using the 0-shell Lemo to 0-shell Lemo cable.

Turn on the controller, then follow the instructions in Starting a Base Survey.

Setting up the Equipment for a Real-Time and Postprocessed Survey

To conduct a survey that uses both real-time and postprocessed techniques, follow the assembly instructions for real-time surveys. If the receiver has no memory (or has a limited memory), use a controller to store raw data at the base receiver.

Starting a Base Survey

To conduct a survey using a predefined survey style, make sure that the required job is open. The title of the main menu should be the current job name.

From the main menu, choose Survey and select a survey style from the list.

A Survey menu is generated. It displays items specific to the chosen survey style and includes the Start base

receiver and Start survey items.

Warning - In a real-time survey, make sure that the radio antenna is connected to the radio before starting the base survey. If it is not, the radio will be damaged.

To start a base survey:

1. From the Survey menu, choose Start base receiver.

♦

If the controller is connected to a receiver that was logging data, the data logging stops.

♦

The first time that you use this survey style, the Style wizard prompts you to specify the equipment you are using.

213

The Start base screen appears.

Note - When you start a survey, the Trimble Survey Controller software automatically negotiates the highest possible baud rate for communicating with the connected receiver.

2. Enter the base station name and coordinates. Use one of the following methods:

♦

If WGS84 coordinates are known:

Access the Point name field and enter the point name. Tap Key in.

In the Key in point screen, set the Method field to Keyed in coordinates. Check that the coordinate fields are Latitude, Longitude, and Height (WGS84). If they are not, tap Options and change the Coordinate view setting to WGS84. Key in the known WGS84 coordinates for the base station, and tap Store.

♦

If grid coordinates are known, and projection and datum transformation parameters are defined:

Access the Point name field and enter the point name. Tap Key in.

In the Key in point screen, set the Method field to Keyed in coordinates. Check that the coordinate fields are Northing, Easting, Elevation. If they are not, tap Options and change the

Coordinate view setting to Grid. Key in the known grid coordinates for the base station, then

♦ tap Store.

If local geodetic coordinates are known and a datum transformation is defined:

Access the Point name field and enter the point name. Tap Key in.

In the Key in point screen, set the Method field to Keyed in coordinates. Check that the coordinate fields are Latitude, Longitude, and Height (Local). If not, tap Options and change the Coordinate view setting to Local. Key in the known local coordinates for the base station, then tap Store. In a real-time survey, select either the current WAAS/EGNOS position, or the current autonomous position, derived by the GPS receiver. Then, access the Point name field and enter the point name. Tap Key in to access the Key in point screen. Tap Here and the current position is displayed. Tap Store to accept and store this position.

Note - If you want a WAAS/EGNOS position, ensure the receiver is tracking a WAAS/EGNOS satellite by checking the WAAS/EGNOS icon is displayed on the status line when you tap Here. The receiver can take 120 seconds to lock on to WAAS/EGNOS. Alternatively, check the Observation

class field before starting the base.

Warning - Within a job, only use an autonomous position (the Here softkey) to start the first base receiver.

Notes

♦

If you carry out a real-time survey using RTCM 2.x corrections and use a base point name that is more than eight characters long, the name will be shortened to eight characters when it is broadcast.

214

♦

If you carry out a real-time survey using RTCM 3.0 corrections, you must use a base point name (in upper case) that is within the range RTCM0000 to RTCM4095.

3. The Observation class field shows the observation class of the base point. For more information, see

Storing GPS points.

4. Enter values in the Code (optional) and Antenna height fields.

5. Set the Measured to field as appropriate.

6. In the Station index field, enter a value.

This value is broadcast in the correction message, and must be in the range 0-31.

Tip - Tap Scan to view a list of other base stations operating on the frequency you are using. The list shows the station index numbers of the other bases and the reliability of each. Choose a different station index number to those displayed.

7. If the receiver you are using supports transmission delays, the Transmission delay field appears.

Choose a value depending on how many base stations you intend to use. For more information about

transmission delays, see Operating Several Base Stations on One Radio Frequency.

8. Tap Start.

The base receiver starts to record data.

9. Do one of the following:

♦

If you are carrying out a real-time survey, the following message appears:

Base started

Disconnect controller from receiver

Disconnect the controller from the base receiver but do not turn off the receiver. You can now set up the rover receiver.

Note - For a real-time survey, check that the radio is working before leaving the equipment.

The data light should be flashing.

♦

If you are logging data in the controller, the Base screen appears. It shows which point is being surveyed and the time that has elapsed since data logging started. Leave the Trimble controller connected to the base receiver and set up the rover using another Trimble controller.

Starting a Trimble 4000 SSe/SSi Base

You cannot start a Trimble 4000 SSE/SSi base receiver using the Trimble Survey Controller software version

12.0 or later.

You can start the Trimble 4000 SSE/SSi base using the front panel of the Trimble 4000 receiver, or with a controller running the Trimble Survey Controller software version 11.3x.

Ending a Base Survey

215

After an RTK survey, or after logging data in the receiver, end the survey as follows:

1. Return to the equipment and select Survey / End survey. Tap Yes to confirm that you want to end the survey, and again to power down the receiver.

2. Turn off the controller.

3. Disconnect the equipment.

After logging base station data in the Trimble controller, end the survey as follows:

1. Return to the equipment and tap Enter.

2. Tap Yes to confirm that you want to end the survey, and again to turn off the receiver.

3. Turn off the controller.

4. Disconnect the equipment.

Base Options

To configure the Base survey when you create or edit a Survey Style:

1. From the main menu, select Configuration / Survey Styles / <Selected GPS Survey Style> / Base options.

2. Choose a survey type.

3. Set the elevation mask.

4. Set the antenna type.

Output additional code RTCM

For real-time surveys, the base receiver can broadcast the RTK message and the RTCM-104 differential message at the same time. To do this, select the Output additional code RTCM check box. (The RTCM output option must be installed on your receiver.)

Note - When RTCM-104 code and CMR messages are being broadcast, the behavior of rover GPS receivers varies according to type. When you are broadcasting CMR with Output additional code RTCM enabled, only use Trimble R7 or 5700 GPS receivers, or 4700 and 4800 GPS receivers with firmware later than v1.2. Not all receivers will function correctly in this environment because their behavior is receiver- and manufacturer-dependent. Most RTCM-only receivers will work correctly. For more information contact your local Trimble dealer.

Warning - Do not use the Output additional code RTCM option when using time delays for sharing the radio frequency.

Tracking L2C

For real-time surveys where the base receiver and all rover receivers that will receive base data from that base receiver can track the L2 civil signal, select the L2C check box. This sets up the base GPS receiver to track the civil signal on the L2 GPS frequency and send those L2C observations to the rovers.

216

Tracking GLONASS

For real-time surveys where the base receiver and rover receivers that will receive base data from that base receiver can track the GLONASS signal, select the GLONASS check box if you want to use the GLONASS observations. This sets up the base GPS receiver to track the GLONASS signals and send those GLONASS observations to the rovers.

For postprocessed surveys where the base receiver and rover receivers can track the GLONASS signal, select the GLONASS check box if you want to use the GLONASS observations. This sets up the GPS receivers to track the GLONASS signals and include the signals in the logged data.

Setting Up the Equipment for a Trimble R8, R6 or 5800 GPS

Survey

This section describes how to assemble the hardware at the rover receiver for a real-time and postprocessed kinematic (PP kinematic) survey. It describes the steps for a Trimble R8, R6, or 5800 GPS receiver.

For more information, go directly to these topics in this section:

Setting up the equipment for a real-time survey

Setting up the equipment for a postprocessed survey

Starting a rover survey

Postprocessed initialization methods

Swapping bases during a real-time rover survey

Ending a rover survey

Setting Up the Equipment for a 'Real-Time' Survey

To set up a rover receiver for a real-time survey using a Trimble R8, R6, or 5800 GPS receiver:

1. Mount the Trimble R8/R6/5800 receiver onto a range pole. Power for the Trimble R8/R6/5800 receiver is supplied by the internal battery in the receiver.

2. Attach the controller to the holder. See:

Attaching and Detaching the Trimble CU Controller.

3. Connect the controller holder to the range pole.

4. Turn on the Trimble R8/R6/5800 receiver.

5. Turn on the controller.

Setting Up the Equipment for a 'Postprocessed' Survey

217

1. Mount the Trimble R8/R6/5800 receiver onto a range pole. Power for the Trimble R8/R6/5800 is supplied by the internal battery in the receiver.

Note - It may be useful to use a bi-pole to hold the range pole while taking measurements.

2. Attach the controller to the holder. See:

Attaching and Detaching the Trimble CU Controller.

3. Connect the controller holder to the range pole.

4. Turn on the Trimble R8/R6/5800 receiver.

Starting a Rover Survey

Only start a survey after you have started the base receiver. For more information, see Starting the Base

Receiver.

To conduct a survey:

1. Make sure that the required job is open. The title of the main menu should be the current job name.

2. From the main menu, choose Survey. Select a survey style from the list.

Note - If you have only one survey style, it is automatically selected.

A Survey menu is generated. It displays items specific to the chosen survey style and includes the Start base

receiver and Start survey items.

When you start a survey using a particular Trimble survey style for the first time, the Trimble Survey

Controller software prompts you to customize the style for your specific hardware.

When the survey starts, the menu items Start base receiver and Start survey no longer appear. For kinematic surveys, a new item, Initialization, appears.

Trimble R8, Trimble R7, Trimble R6, 5800, 5700, 4800, or 4700 GPS receiver

Warning - If you start a survey while the receiver is logging data, logging stops. If you start a survey that specifies data logging, logging restarts to a different file.

Note - When you start a survey, the Trimble Survey Controller software automatically negotiates the highest possible baud rate for communicating with the connected receiver.

Starting a Real-Time Rover Survey

To start the rover receiver for a real-time survey:

1. Select Start survey.

2. Make sure the rover is receiving radio corrections from the base.

Note - An RTK survey needs radio corrections.

218

3. If the receiver you are using supports transmission delays and you select the Prompt for station index check box in the Rover options field, the Select base station screen appears. It shows all the base stations operating on the frequency you are using. The list shows the station index numbers of each base and the reliability of each. Highlight the base you want to use and tap Enter.

For more information about using transmission delays, see

Multiple bases on one frequency.

Tip - If you want to check the point name of the base station being used in the rover survey, select

Files / Review current job and inspect the Base point record.

4. If necessary, initialize the survey.

Note - If you are carrying out an RTK survey but do not require centimeter-level results, select

Survey / Initialization. Tap Init and set the Method field to No initialization.

For an RTK survey, initialize before starting centimeter-level surveying. If you are using a dual-frequency receiver with the OTF option, the survey automatically starts to initialize using the

OTF initialization method.

5. When the survey is initialized, you can perform a site calibration, measure points, or stakeout.

Starting an RTK & Infill Rover Survey

Note - If you are using postprocessed techniques, to process the data you must have the Baseline Processing module of the Trimble Geomatics Office software installed.

To start the rover receiver for an RTK & infill survey:

1. Select Start Survey.

2. Make sure the rover is receiving radio corrections from the base.

Note - An RTK survey needs radio corrections.

3. If the receiver you are using supports transmission delays and the Prompt for station index check box in the Rover options option in the survey style is selected, the Select base station screen appears. It shows all the base stations operating on the frequency you are using. The list shows the station index numbers of each base and the reliability of each. Highlight the base you want to use and tap Enter.

For more information about using transmission delays, see

Multiple bases on one frequency.

Tip - If you want to check the point name of the base station being used in the rover survey, select

Files / Review current job and inspect the Base point record.

4. Initialize the survey using an RTK initialization method.

5. Measure points as usual.

Switching to PP infill

219

During periods when no base corrections are received, the following message flashes in the status line:

Radio link down

To continue surveying select Start PP infill from the Survey menu. When postprocessing infill starts, this item changes to Stop PP infill.

Raw data is logged at the rover during postprocessing (PP) infill. For successful baseline resolution, you must now use postprocessed kinematic observation techniques.

Note - Initialization cannot be transferred between the RTK survey and the PP infill survey. Initialize the PP infill survey like any other postprocessed kinematic survey. For more information, see

Postprocessed

Initialization Methods.

Only rely on the OTF (automatic) initialization if you are certain that the receiver will observe at least five satellites, without interruption, for the next 15 minutes. Otherwise, select Initialization from the Survey menu and perform an initialization.

Note - You cannot stake out points during a postprocessed survey.

When base corrections are received again, one of the following messages appears in the status line, depending on the initialization mode of the RTK survey:

•

Radio link up (RTK=Fixed)

•

Radio link up (RTK=Float)

The first message is displayed if the receiver has retained the RTK initialization during the PP infill survey.

That is, if the number of satellites did not fall below four throughout the PP infill survey.

Select Stop PP infill from the Survey menu to stop data logging at the rover. When postprocessing infill stops, this item changes back to Start PP infill. Real-time measurements are resumed.

Starting a Postprocessed Rover Survey

To start the rover receiver for a postprocessed survey, select Start survey.

Note - If using postprocessed techniques, to process the data you must have the Baseline Processing module of the Trimble Geomatics Office software installed.

You can begin surveying immediately, you do not need to initialize a FastStatic or

differential survey.

You must initialize a PP kinematic survey to achieve centimeter-level precisions when the data is processed.

With dual-frequency receivers, the initialization process begins automatically if at least five L1/L2 satellites are being observed.

For more information about initializing a postprocessed survey, see

Postprocessed Initialization Methods.

For

information about measuring points, see Measure Points.

220

Working in Float mode

Work in Float mode if you do not want to initialize a survey. Start the survey and select Initialization. When the Initialization screen appears, press Init. Set the Method field to No initialization and tap Enter.

Starting a Rover Survey

Starting a rover survey is the same as for a

Real-time survey.

To start a survey using VRS or SAPOS FKP, you must send an approximate position for the rover receiver to the control station. When you start the survey, this position is automatically sent through your radio communications link in a standard NMEA position message. It is used to compute the RTK corrections your receiver will use.

Swapping Bases During a Real-Time Rover Survey

If you are using multiple bases on the same frequency, you can swap bases during the rover survey. For more

information, see Multiple bases on one frequency.

To swap bases, do the following:

•

From the Survey menu, select Swap base receiver.

The Select base station screen appears. It shows all the base stations operating on the frequency you are using. The list shows the station index numbers of each base and the reliability of each. Tap the base you want to use.

Note - When you change to a different base, your OTF receiver automatically starts the initialization.

Ending a Rover Survey

When you have measured or staked out all points required, do the following:

1. From the Survey menu, choose End survey.

The Trimble Survey Controller software asks if you want to power down the receiver. Tap Yes to confirm this.

Note - When using a Trimble R3 receiver you are not prompted to turn off the receiver. The receiver turns off when the controller is turned off.

2. Turn off the controller before disconnecting the equipment.

Return to the base station and end the base survey. For more information, see Ending a Base Survey.

221

Rover Options

To configure the Rover survey when you create or edit a Survey Style:

1. From the main menu, select Configuration / Survey Styles / <Selected GPS Survey Style> / Rover options.

2. Choose a survey type and set the associated parameters.

Generally, when a GPS Total Station setup consists of one base and one rover receiver, make sure the survey type selected in the Rover options field and the Base options field is the same. However, when there are multiple rovers, you can have various configurations. The following table shows the rover survey types that are possible when the base survey type is RTK & infill or PP Kinematic.

Base survey type Possible rover survey types

RTK & infill or

RTK & data logging

PP Kinematic

RTK

RTK & infill

PP Kinematic

FastStatic

PP KinematicFastStatic

Broadcast format

For Real-time Kinematic surveys, the format of the broadcast message can be CMR, CMR +, or RTCM RTK.

CMR is Compact Measurement Record; RTCM is Radio Technical Commission for Maritime Services.

The default is CMR +, which is a format used by the modern Trimble receivers. It is a modified type of CMR record that improves the efficiency of a low bandwidth radio link in realtime surveys. Only use CMR + if all the receivers have the CMR + option installed. To check if this option is installed in the receiver, select

Instrument / Options on the controller that is connected to a receiver.

Note - If you want to operate several base stations on one frequency, use CMR+. For more information, see

Operating several base stations on one radio frequency.

For

wide-area RTK surveys, the broadcast message format can be from the following wide-area RTK

solutions: SAPOS FKP, VRS (CMR), and VRS (RTCM). For more information, see

Starting a wide area RTK survey.

For

wide-area RTK surveys, the broadcast message format can be from the following wide-area RTK

solutions: SAPOS FKP, VRS (CMR), VRS (RTCM), and RTCM3Net. For more information, see

Starting a wide area RTK survey.

Network RTK is also supported in the form of "Multi station" surveys with both CMR and RTCM formats.

These surveys allow you to connect to a network service provider by cellular modem or through the Internet, and receive CMR or RTCM data from the nearest physical reference station in the network.

The rover selection should always correspond to the broadcast message format generated by the base.

222

Satellite differential

When the radio link is down in a real-time survey, the receiver can track and use signals from a Wide Area

Augmentation System (WAAS) available in North America, or from the European Global Navigation Overlay

Service (EGNOS) available in Europe. These systems provide WAAS/EGNOS positions instead of autonomous GPS positions.

To use WAAS/EGNOS positions for more accurate navigation when the radio link is down, set the Satellite

differential field to either WAAS or EGNOS. To use WAAS/EGNOS at times when the satellites are broadcasting in test mode, select the Ignore health option.

Note - For WAAS/EGNOS surveys, you must use a receiver that can track WAAS/EGNOS satellites.

Use station index

If you want to use multiple base stations on one radio frequency, enter the station index number that you want to use first in the Use station index field.

If you do not want to use multiple base stations on one frequency, enter the same station index number that you enter in the Base options screen.

To use any base station operating on the frequency set in the rover radio, tap Any.

Warning - If you tap Any and there are other base stations operating on the frequency, your rover survey could receive corrections from the wrong base.

For information about using multiple bases, see

Multiple bases on one frequency.

Prompt for station index

When you use a receiver that supports multiple base stations on one radio frequency, the Trimble Survey

Controller software asks you to specify the base to use when you start the rover survey. You can stop this question from appearing by clearing the Prompt for station index check box. The station index number in the

Use station index field is used.

Elevation mask

You must define an elevation mask below which satellites are not considered. For kinematic applications, the default of 10° is ideal for both the base and rover.

For differential surveys where the base and rover are separated by more than 100 kilometers, Trimble recommends that the base elevation mask be lower than the rover setting by 1° per 100 kilometers of separation between the base and rover. Generally, the base elevation mask should be no lower than 10°.

PDOP mask

For the rover option, define a PDOP mask. The Trimble Survey Controller software issues high PDOP warnings when the satellite geometry goes above this threshold. The default value is 6.

223

Logging device

With survey types that involve postprocessing, set the Logging device to be either the Receiver or Controller.

To define the logging interval, enter a value in the Logging interval field. The base and rover logging intervals must correspond to (or be multiples of) each other.

Antenna type

To set the default antenna height, enter a value in the Antenna height field.

To define the antenna details, access the Type field and select the correct antenna from the list of antennas.

Access the Measured to field and select the correct measurement method for the equipment and type of survey. The field that displays the part number is automatically filled. Key in the serial number.

Tracking L2C

For real-time surveys where the base data contains L2C observations, select the L2C check box. This sets up the rover GPS receiver to track the civil signal on the L2 GPS frequency to match what the base station receiver is tracking.

Use this option only when the base receiver can track L2C, and when you selected the L2C box in the base options when you started the base survey.

Tracking GLONASS

For real-time surveys where the base data contains GLONASS observations, select the GLONASS check box.

This sets up the rover receiver to track the GLONASS satellites to match what the base station receiver is tracking.

You can use this setting to track GLONASS satellites at the rover even if the base receiver is not tracking

GLONASS. However, the satellites will not be used in the RTK processing.

Measuring Antenna Heights

The following describes how to measure the height of an antenna mounted on a range pole when the

Measured to field is set to Bottom of antenna or Bottom of antenna mount. With a fixed height range pole, the height is a constant value.

Measuring the Height of an Antenna on a Tripod

The way to measure this depends on the equipment used.

224

Zephyr antenna

If this antenna is mounted on a tripod, measure the height to the top of the notch on the side of the antenna.

Refer to the following diagram where (1) is the Zephyr antenna, (2) is the corrected height to APC and (3) is the uncorrected height.

Zephyr Geodetic antenna

If this antenna is mounted on a tripod, measure the height to the bottom of the notch on the side of the antenna.

Trimble R8, R6, and 5800 GPS receiver

If this receiver is mounted on a tripod, measure the height to the bottom of the groove between the gray base and the white top of the antenna, and select Center of bumper in the Measured to field.

Refer to the following diagram where (1) is the Trimble GPS receiver, (2) is the corrected height to APC and

(3) is the uncorrected height of 1.80m.

Tip - If you are using a fixed height tripod, you can measure the height to the bottom of the antenna housing and select Bottom of antenna mount in the Measured to field.

Micro-centered L1/L2 antenna

If this antenna is mounted on a tripod, measure the height to the bottom of the plastic housing. Enter this value in the Antenna height field and set the Measured to field to Bottom of antenna.

225

Refer to the following diagram where (1) is the Micro-centered antenna, (2) is the corrected height to APC and (3) is the uncorrected height.

Ground plane

If you are using a ground plane, see the next section.

Measuring the Height of an Antenna When Using a Ground Plane

If the Micro-centered antenna (or a Compact L1/L2 antenna) has a ground plane measure to the underside of the notch in the ground plane.

Refer to the following diagram where (1) is the Micro-centered L1/L2 antenna, (2) is the ground plane, (3) is the underside of the notch and (4) is the top of the notch.

Tip - Measure the height to three different notches around the perimeter of the ground plane. Then record the average as the uncorrected antenna height.

226

Antenna.ini File

The Trimble Survey Controller software includes an integrated Antenna.ini file that contains a list of antennas that you can choose from when creating a survey style. You cannot edit this list in the Trimble Survey

Controller software. However, if you want to shorten the list or add a new antenna type, you can edit and transfer a new Antenna.ini file.

To edit the antenna.ini file, use a text editor such as Microsoft Notepad. Edit the Trimble Survey Controller group, and transfer the new Antenna.ini file to the Trimble Survey Controller software, using Trimble's Data

Transfer utility.

Note - When you transfer an Antenna.ini file, it overwrites any existing file of that name. The information in this file is also used in preference to the antenna information built into the Trimble Survey Controller software.

RTK Initialization Methods

If base corrections are being received and there are sufficient satellites, the survey is initialized automatically when you start the survey. A survey must be initialized before centimeter-level surveying can begin.

The number of satellites required depends on whether you are using GPS satellites only, or a combination of

GPS and GLONASS satellites. The following table summarizes the requirements.

Minimum L1/L2 satellites required for initialization

Satellite Systems GPS GLONASS

GPS only 5 0

GPS + GLONASS 4

GPS + GLONASS 3

GPS + GLONASS 2 4

GLONASS only N/A N/A

Note - You cannot initialize if the DOP is greater than 7.

After initialization, a position can be determined and the initialization can be maintained with one satellite less than the number required to initialize. If the number of satellites drops below this number, the survey must be reinitialized.

The following table summarizes the requirements.

Minimum L1/L2 satellites required to maintain initialization and produce positions

Satellite Systems GPS GLONASS

GPS only 4 0

227

GPS + GLONASS 4

GPS + GLONASS 3

GPS + GLONASS 2

GPS + GLONASS 1

GLONASS only N/A N/A

After initialization, the survey mode changes from Float to Fixed. The mode remains Fixed if the receiver continuously tracks the minimum number of satellites. If the mode changes to Float, you must reinitialize the survey.

Multipath

Initialization reliability depends on the initialization method used and on whether or not multipath occurred during the initialization phase. Multipath occurs when GPS signals are reflected off objects, such as the ground or a building.

The occurrence of multipath at the GPS antenna adversely affects GPS initializations and solutions:

•

If initialization is by the Known Point method, multipath can cause an initialization attempt to fail.

•

During initialization by the OTF method, it is difficult to detect multipath, which may cause initialization to be lengthy or unsuccessful. For more information, see

Recommended RTK

Initialization Procedure.

The initialization process in Trimble receivers is very reliable, but if an incorrect initialization does occur,

Trimble's RTK processing routines detect it, discards the initialization automatically and issues a warning.

Note - If you survey points with a bad initialization, you will get position errors. To minimize the effect of multipath during an OTF initialization, move around.

Known Point Initialization

To perform a Known Point initialization:

1. Position the rover antenna over a known point.

2. From the Survey menu, choose Initialization.

3. Set the Method field to Known Point.

4. Access the Point name field and tap List. Select the point from the list of known points.

5. Enter values in the Antenna height field, and make sure that the setting in the Measured to field is correct.

6. When the antenna is centered and vertical over the point, tap Start.

The controller starts to record data, and the static icon ( ) appears in the status bar. Keep the antenna vertical and stationary while data is recorded.

7. When the receiver is initialized, the following message appears:

Initialization change. Initialization has been gained. The results are displayed. Tap Accept to accept

228

the initialization.

8. If the initialization fails, the results are displayed. Tap Retry to retry the initialization.

Recommended RTK Initialization Procedure

This section describes the procedure that Trimble recommends for performing a check on an OTF RTK initialization.

Minimize the chance of surveying with a bad initialization by adopting good survey techniques. A bad initialization occurs when the integer ambiguities are not correctly resolved. The Trimble Survey Controller software automatically reinitializes when this is detected, but cannot do so if you end the survey too soon. As a precaution, always perform the RTK initialization described below.

When initializing, always choose a site that has a clear view of the sky and is free of obstructions that could cause multipath.

Note - Known Point is the quickest method of initialization when known points exist.

To perform an On-The-Fly initialization:

1. Initialize the survey using the OTF method of initialization.

Tip - When performing an OTF initialization, move around to reduce the effect of multipath.

2. When the system is initialized, establish a mark about 9 meters (30 feet) from where the initialization occurred.

3. Conduct a static point measurement over the mark. Once this is done, discard the current initialization.

4. If you are using an adjustable height range pole, change the height of the antenna by approximately

8 inches.

5. Reoccupy the mark observed in step 2, and reinitialize the survey using either the OTF or Known

Point method of initialization. Remember to enter the new antenna height details.

Follow this procedure to substantially improve the quality of an initialization.

Measuring a new point creates a known point on which the first initialization is tested. Changing the antenna height moves the GPS antenna from the environment in which the test point was initially surveyed. Always enter the new antenna height before starting the Known Point initialization.

Postprocessed Initialization Methods

In a postprocessed survey you must initialize to attain centimeter-level precisions.

Use one of the following methods to initialize dual-frequency postprocessed kinematic surveys in the field:

•

On-The-Fly

•

Known Point

229

Note - In a postprocessed survey, collect enough data during initialization so that the WAVE processor can successfully process it. The following table shows Trimble's recommended times.

Initialization method 4 SVs 5 SVs 6+ SVs

L1/L2 OTF initialization N/A 15 min 8 min

Known Point initialization at least four epochs

After initialization, the survey mode changes from Float to Fixed. The mode remains Fixed if the receiver continuously tracks at least four satellites. If the mode changes to Float, reinitialize the survey.

Note - If you do an On-The-Fly initialization in a postprocessed kinematic survey, it is possible to measure points before initialization is gained. The Trimble Geomatics Office software can back-process the data later to give a fixed solution. If you do this but lose lock on the satellites while initializing, re-measure any one of the points that you surveyed before lock was lost.

To work without initializing the survey (in Float mode), start a survey and select Initialization. When the

Initialization screen appears, tap Init. Set the Method field to No initialization and tap Enter.

Known Point Initialization

In a postprocessed survey you can initialize on:

• a point measured previously in the current job

• a point that you will provide coordinates for later (before the data is postprocessed)

See

Known Point initialization

for instructions.

RTK Survey

Real-time kinematic surveys use a radio to broadcast signals from the base station to the rover. The rover then calculates its position in real time. Configure this type of survey when you create or edit a Survey Style, then follow these steps to carry out an RTK survey:

Configure the survey style

Configure the base receiver

Configure the rover receiver

Begin the survey

End the survey

Configure the survey style

To do this:

1. From the main menu, select Configuration / Survey styles / RTK.

2. Select each of the options in turn, and set them to suit your equipment and survey preferences.

3. When you have configured all the settings, tap Store to save them.

230

For more information, see:

Observed control point

Rapid point

Continuous points

Configuring the Survey Style for a Site Calibration

Configuring the Survey Style for a Site Calibration

Configure the base receiver

To do this:

1. Set up the base station and connect the data collector.

2. From the main menu, select Survey / RTK / Start base receiver. If you are using this Survey Style for the first time, the Style wizard prompts you to specify the type of equipment you are using.

The style wizard customizes the chosen survey style, setting any parameters specific to the hardware.

Tip - To correct a mistake when customizing a survey style, first complete the process and then edit the style.

Note - With the Trimble R7, 5800, 5700, 4800 or 4700 GPS receivers, use an external radio at the base even if you use the internal radio at the rover.

Tip - You can use a Custom radio if the radio you have is not listed.

3. Enter the point name. If the WGS-84 point is not already in the database, the Key in / Point screen appears.

4. Enter values, or tap Here to use the current position. Only use Here once in a job.

5. Enter the code.

6. Enter the antenna height and tap Enter.

7. Disconnect the data collector from the base station.

231

Note - The first time that you start the base or the rover receiver, you must select the type of antenna that you are using from a list. The following table shows some common choices.

Receiver and station

GPS Total Station receivers

Trimble R7 / 5700 4800 4700

Base receiver

Rover receiver

Zephyr Geodetic 4800 Internal Micro-centered L1/L2 w/GP

Zephyr

Configure the rover receiver

4800 Internal Micro-centered L1/L2

To do this:

1. Set up the Rover receiver and connect the data collector.

2. From the main menu, select Survey / RTK / Start survey. Again, the Style wizard may prompt you to specify the type of equipment you are using.

3. Initialize the survey. If you have selected the On-The-Fly (OTF) option, initialization is automatic.

Otherwise, the Initialization screen appears.

4. Once the rover is initialized, the survey mode in the status line shows as RTK:Fixed. You can then measure points.

Begin the survey

To do this:

1. From the main menu, select Survey / Measure points.

2. Enter the point name and code.

3. In the Type field, select Topo point.

4. Enter the antenna height.

5. Tap Measure. The antenna must remain stationary and vertical while you measure a point.

6. Tap Store to store the point.

7. Move to the next point and measure it.

8. To review stored points, select Review current job from the Files menu.

End the survey

To do this:

1. From the main menu, select Survey / End GPS survey.

2. Tap Yes to confirm.

3. Turn off the data collector.

For more information, see:

232

Swap base receiver

Operating Several Base Stations on One Radio Frequency

In an RTK survey you can reduce the effects of radio interference from other base stations on the same frequency by operating your base station with a different transmission delay. This allows you to operate several base stations on one frequency. The general procedure is as follows:

1. Check that you have the correct hardware and firmware.

2. Set up the equipment and start a survey at each base station, specifying a transmission delay and a station index number.

3. Start a rover survey and specify which base to use.

Hardware and firmware requirements

To operate several base stations on one frequency, you must use receivers that support the CMR + correction record format.

All other base and rover receivers must be Trimble R8, R7, R6, 5800, or 5700 GPS receivers, or 4700 or 4800

GPS receivers with firmware version 1.20 or later.

Note - Do not use transmission delays if you intend to use radio repeaters.

Starting the base with a transmission delay

When you use multiple base stations, you set the transmission delay for each base when you start the base survey. Each base must broadcast with a different transmission delay and station index number. The delays allow the rover to receive corrections from all of the base stations at once. The station index numbers let you select which base station to use at the rover.

Note - You can set the base radio transmission delay only when using Trimble R8, R7, R6, 5800, or 5700

GPS receivers, or 4700 or 4800 GPS receivers with firmware version 1.20 or later.

When you carry out surveys using different base stations in one job, make sure that the coordinates of the base stations are in the same coordinate system and are in terms of each other.

Before you start the base receiver, do the following:

1. Select the CMR + correction message format. Select this in the survey style for both the base and the rover.

2. Set the over air baud rate in the radio to at least 4800 baud.

Note - If you use a 4800 over air baud rate you can only use two base stations on one frequency. Increase the

233

over air baud rate if you want to increase the number of base stations on one frequency.

When you start the base survey, do the following:

1. In the Station index field, enter a value within the range 0-31. This number is broadcast in the correction message.

Tip - You can configure the default station index number in the survey style. For more information,

refer to Station index.

2. If the receiver you are using supports transmission delays, the Transmission delay field appears.

Choose a value, depending on how many base stations you want to use. See the following table.

No. of base stations

Use these delays (in ms) ...

Base 1 Base 2 Base 3 Base 4

One

0 -

Two

0 500 -

Three

0 350 700 -

Four

0 250 500 750

For more information about starting the base survey, see

Starting a Base Survey.

For information about starting the rover and selecting which station index to use, see Starting a Rover Survey.

Starting a Real Time Survey Using a Dial-in GSM connection

If you are receiving corrections from a single base station, do not start the survey until you have started the

base receiver. For more information, see Starting the Base Receiver.

To start the rover receiver for a real-time survey:

1. If you are using a cellular modem, make sure that the modem is switched on, then connect it to the receiver (or to the controller if you selected the

Route through SC

option.

2. If you are using a Trimble Internal GSM/GPRS module, make sure that the receiver is turned on and is connected to the controller.

3. From the main menu, select Survey / (Selected Survey Style) / Start Survey.

The message Connecting to modem appears. Once the connection is completed, the modem dials the base station or Wide Area RTK service provider.

Once the cellular modem or Trimble Internal GSM/GPRS module signals are received, and the corrections data link is established, the cellular phone icon appears on the status bar.

Tip - Select the Prompt for dial profile check box to display the dial profile that is configured in the

234

survey style, or change the dial profile when you start the survey.

To end the survey, select Survey / (Selected Survey Style) / End survey.

The modem hangs up during the end survey process.

Note – When you send initialization strings to the modem, if you see the error message "No response from modem", check that the strings you set in the survey style are valid for your particular modem. Some modems accept only upper case AT commands.

Note - To configure a Survey style for a real-time dial-in GSM survey see

Configuring a Survey Style for a

Dial-in Real Time Survey.

Starting a Real Time Survey Using a GPRS internet connection

If you are receiving corrections from a single base station, do not start the survey until you have started the

base receiver. For more information, see Starting the Base Receiver.

To start the rover receiver for a real-time survey:

1. If you are using a cellular modem, make sure that the modem is switched on, then connect it to the receiver.

2. If you are using a Trimble Internal GSM/GPRS module, make sure that the receiver is turned on and is connected to the controller.

3. From the main menu, select Survey / (Selected Survey Style) / Start Survey.

The message "Establishing network connection" appears. Once the connection is completed, the modem receives corrections from the base station or Wide Area RTK service provider through the

Internet connection.

Once the corrections data link is established, the radio icon appears on the status bar.

Tip - Select the Prompt for dial profile check box to display the dial profile that is configured in the survey style, or change the dial profile when you start the survey.

Note - To configure a Survey style for a real-time internet survey see

Configuring a Survey Style for an

Internet Real Time Survey.

Note - When you start a survey with the controller already connected to the Internet, the existing connection is used for the base data. The Internet connection does not close when you end the survey.

When you start a survey with the controller not connected to the Internet, the controller will open an Internet connection using the connection specified in the Survey Style. This connection closes when you end the survey.

235

Redialing the Base Station

If you lose the phone connection during a GSM dial-in survey, use the Redial function to reconnect to the

base station or Wide Area RTK network.

Alternatively, you can hang up the modem using the Trimble Survey Controller software, continue the survey, and later redial the base to re-establish corrections.

To hang up and redial:

1. Tap the Cellular phone icon on the status bar. The Rover radio screen appears.

2. To hang up the modem, tap Hang up.

3. To redial the base station, tap Redial.

Note - When you redial a VRS service provider, a new base station position is sent through the data link.

When the Trimble Survey Controller software switches to the new base, the survey continues with this new position.

Starting a Wide-Area RTK Survey

Wide Area RTK (WA RTK) systems consist of a distributed network of reference stations communicating with a control center to calculate GPS error corrections over a wide area. Real-time correction data is transmitted by radio or cellular modem to the rover receiver within the network area.

The system improves reliability and operating range by significantly reducing systematic errors in the reference station data. This lets you increase the distance at which the rover receiver can be located from the physical reference stations, while improving on-the-fly (OTF) initialization times.

The Trimble Survey Controller software supports broadcast formats from the following WA RTK solutions:

•

SAPOS FKP

•

Virtual Reference Station (VRS)

•

RTCM3Net

To use a WA RTK system, first check that you have the necessary hardware and firmware.

Hardware Requirements

All rover receivers must have firmware that support WA RTK. For details of availability, check the Trimble website or contact your local dealer.

Real-time correction data is provided by radio or cellular modem. For details about the delivery option for your system, contact your local dealer.

Configuring the Survey Style

236

Before you start a survey using a WA RTK system, configure the RTK survey style.

To select a WA RTK broadcast format:

1. In the survey style, select Rover options.

2. In the Broadcast format field, select one of the following options from the list:

♦

SAPOS FKP

♦

VRS (RTCM)

♦

VRS (CMR)

♦

RTCM3Net

To store VRS vectors to the nearest Physical Base Station (PBS) in the VRS network, the VRS system must be configured to output the PBS information. If the VRS system does not output PBS data, VRS data must be stored as positions.

To select a radio solution:

1. In the survey style, select Rover radio.

2. In the Type field, select your radio from the list.

Note - If you are using a radio in a VRS system, you must select a two-way radio. You cannot use Trimble internal 450 MHz or 900 MHz radios.

RTK and Infill Survey

This type of survey allows you to continue a kinematic survey when radio contact is lost. The infill data must be postprocessed.

Configure an RTK and Infill survey when you create or edit a Survey Style.

To do this:

1. From the main menu, select Configuration / Survey Styles / RTK & infill / Base options.

2. In the Survey type field, select RTK and infill.

3. Specify the logging device and logging interval.

4. Do the same for Rover options.

To receive WAAS/EGNOS positions instead of autonomous positions when the radio is down, set the

Satellite differential field to WAAS (North America) or EGNOS (Europe).

To receive GLONASS positions as well as GPS positions, select the GLONASS check box.

The logging interval is for the infill session only and should be the same for each receiver, typically 5 seconds. The RTK interval remains at 1 second.

When radio contact is lost, the following message flashes in the status line: 'Radio link down'.

237

To start infill:

1. From the main menu, select Survey / RTK & infill / Start PP infill.

2. Initialize, and continue as for a postprocessed kinematic survey.

When the radio link returns, select Survey / Stop PP infill from the main menu and continue with your RTK survey.

For more information, see:

Observed Control Point

Rapid Point

Continuous Points

Configuring the Survey Style for a Site Calibration

RTK and Data Logging

This type of survey records raw GPS data during an RTK survey.

As this survey style is not provided by the Trimble Survey Controller software, you must create the style the first time that you want to use it.

To do this:

1. From the main menu, select Configuration / Survey Styles and tap New.

2. Type in RTK and data logging and tap Enter.

3. Select Base options.

4. In the Survey type field, select RTK and logging.

5. Specify the logging device and the logging interval.

238

6. Repeat steps 4-6 for Rover options.

The logging interval should be the same for each receiver - typically 5 seconds. The RTK interval remains at

1 second.

To receive GLONASS positions as well as GPS positions, select the GLONASS check box.

For more information, see:

Observed Control Point

Rapid Point

Continuous Topo Points

Configuring the Survey Style for a Site Calibration

FastStatic Survey

A FastStatic survey is a postprocessed survey using occupations of up to 20 minutes to collect raw GNSS data. The data is postprocessed to achieve sub-centimeter precisions. Typically, the occupation times vary based on the number of satellites. A minimum of four satellites is required.

Configure a FastStatic survey when you create or edit a Survey Style.

To do this:

1. From the main menu, select Configuration / Survey Styles / FastStatic / Base options.

2. In the Survey Type field select FastStatic.

3. Do the same for Rover options.

To receive GLONASS positions as well as GPS positions, select the GLONASS check box.

239

For more information, see:

Rover Options

Base Options

Starting a rover survey

Laser Rangefinder

FastStatic Point

PPK Survey

Postprocessed Kinematic surveys store raw observations and process them later.

Configure a PPK survey when you create or edit a Survey Style.

To do this:

1. From the main menu, select Configuration / Survey Styles / PPK / Base options.

2. In the Survey Type field select PP Kinematic

3. Do the same for Rover options.

To store GLONASS positions as well as GPS positions, select the GLONASS check box.

Note - When logging PPK data to the controller with a Trimble R8 or R6 GNSS receiver, you must have receiver firmware version 3.30 or later installed. Otherwise, the message "Unsupported receiver firmware version" appears. If this occurs, upgrade the receiver firmware, or log the data to the receiver.

When you use this type of survey, the default logging interval is five seconds. If your receiver is capable of storing data, the first time that you use this survey style, the Style wizard prompts you to specify where you want to store the data.

Before you measure points,

initialize

the survey using one of the following methods:

•

Known point

•

New point

•

On-The-Fly (OTF)

When you are familiar with the equipment, you can configure the PP initialization times.

For more information, see:

240

Rover Options

Base Options

Starting a rover survey

Laser Rangefinder

FastStatic Point

To use Wide Area Augmentation System positions when you do not have a radio, set the broadcast

PP Initialization Times

Select the PP initialization times survey style option to define initialization times. Generally the default settings are appropriate.

Warning - Reducing any of these times can affect the outcome of a postprocessed survey. Increase these times rather than decrease them.

The number of satellites required depends on whether you are using GPS satellites only, or a combination of

GPS and GLONASS satellites. The following table summarizes the requirements.

Minimum L1/L2 satellites required for On-The-Fly initialization

Satellite Systems GPS GLONASS

GPS only 5

GPS + GLONASS 4

GPS + GLONASS 3

GPS + GLONASS 2

GLONASS only N/A N/A

Note - You cannot initialize if the DOP is greater than 20.

The following table summarizes the requirements.

Minimum L1/L2 satellites required to maintain initialization and produce positions

Satellite Systems GPS GLONASS

GPS only 4 0

GPS + GLONASS 4 1

241

GPS + GLONASS 3

GPS + GLONASS 2

GPS + GLONASS 1 4

GLONASS only N/A N/A

RT Differential Survey

This survey type uses a radio to broadcast a correction message (RTCM-104) from the base station to the rover which then calculates its position. A real-time differential survey gives sub meter level precisions.

Differential surveys require four satellites that are common to the base and the rover receivers. Differential surveys do not require initialization.

The two differential survey types are described in the following sections:

•

RT differential - This survey uses the RTCM broadcast message and relies on a reliable radio for the duration of the survey. Alternatively, use WAAS/EGNOS signals to provide real-time positions

• instead of a radio.

RT diff & logging - This survey works in the same way as an RT differential survey, except that data is recorded for the entire survey both at the base and at the rover receivers. This method is useful if raw data is required for quality assurance purposes.

As this survey style is not provided by the Trimble Survey Controller software, you must create the style the first time that you want to use it.

To do this:

1. From the main menu, select Configuration / Survey Styles.

2. Tap New.

3. Enter a name in the Style name field.

4. In the Style type field, choose GPS and tap Accept.

5. Choose Rover options or Base options and make the appropriate changes to the Type field. In this case, change it to the differential method that you want to use. The survey type you select depends on whether the technique you choose is real-time or postprocessed.

6. For both real-time and postprocessed techniques, define an elevation mask and antenna for the base and the rover. For the Rover options, define Broadcast format, the PDOP mask, and the RTCM age limit. In a differential survey you can choose to set the Broadcast format field to RTCM, WAAS

(North America), or EGNOS (Europe).

7. For methods that involve data logging, specify whether the data is to be logged in the receiver or in the controller, and define the interval. For real-time techniques, the RTCM-SC104 version 2 broadcast message format is used. Real-time signals are generated at 1second intervals.

242

format to WAAS (North America) or EGNOS (Europe).

9. To receive WAAS/EGNOS positions instead of autonomous positions when the radio is down, set the broadcast format to RTCM and set the Satellite differential field to WAAS or EGNOS.

Note - For WAAS/EGNOS surveys, you must use a receiver that can track WAAS/EGNOS satellites.

For more information, see:

Observed Control Point

Rapid Point

Continuous Topo Points

Configuring the Survey Style for a Site Calibration

Configuring an integrated survey style

Wide Area Augmentation System (WAAS) and European Global

Navigation Overlay Service (EGNOS)

WAAS is a satellite-based delivery system for differential positions. It is available only in North America.

The equivalent system in Europe is the European Global Navigation Overlay Service (EGNOS), and in Asia it is MSAS.

WAAS and EGNOS signals provide real-time, differentially corrected positions without the need for a radio link. You can use WAAS or EGNOS in real-time surveys when the ground-based radio link is down.

To use WAAS signals, in the Rover options screen of your survey style, set Satellite differential to WAAS or

EGNOS, depending on your location.

In real-time differential surveys, you can set the broadcast format to WAAS or EGNOS to always store

WAAS/EGNOS positions without the need for a radio link.

243

When WAAS/EGNOS signals are being received, the radio icon changes to a WAAS/EGNOS icon, and in an

RTK survey, RTK:WAAS is displayed on the status line.

The availability of WAAS/EGNOS signals depends on your location and the receiver that you are using. See your Trimble dealer for details.

Rapid Point

This is a method for measuring real-time GPS points quickly. Configure this type of point when you create or edit a GPS Survey Style. The point is stored when the preset precisions have been satisfied. There is no minimum occupation time.

The Trimble Survey Controller software collects just one epoch of data when the preset precisions are reached, so the default precision values should ideally be higher than for other point measurement types. The software uses this single epoch of data to define the point, making Rapid point the least precise measurement method.

Alternatively, you can change the Type field to Rapid point in the Measure points screen, and tap Options.

To measure a Rapid point:

1. Do one of the following:

♦

From the main menu, select Survey / Measure points.

♦

Tap Favorites and select Measure points.

2. Enter values in the Point name and Code fields (the Code field entry is optional), and enter Rapid

point in the Type field.

3. Enter a value in the Antenna height field and make sure that the setting in the Measured to field is set appropriately.

4. Tap Measure to start recording data. The point is automatically stored when the preset precisions are reached.

Continuous Topo

Use the continuous topo function to measure points continuously.

A point is stored when one of the following conditions occurs:

• a predefined time has elapsed

• a predefined distance has been exceeded

• both predefined time and/or distance settings have been met

• a predefined stop time and distance settings have been met

244

To configure the survey style for Continuous topo:

If you are doing a postprocessed survey, the time interval is the logging interval. Configure this logging interval in the Rover options screen of the postprocessed survey style.

To measure Continuous topo points:

1. From the main menu, select Survey / Continuous topo.

2. In the Type field, select Fixed time, Fixed distance, Time and distance, Time or distance or Stop and go.

Note - For a postprocessed survey, you can only use the Fixed time continuous method. The time interval is set by default to the same value as the logging interval.

3. Enter a value in the Antenna height field and make sure that the setting in the Measured to field is set appropriately.

4. Enter a value in the Time interval field, or the Stop and go field and/or the Distance field, depending on the method you are using.

5. To generate offsets, set the Offset field to One or Two. The Fixed time method does not support offsets.

6. Enter a value in the Start point name field (or enter a start point name for the center line when measuring offset points). This increments automatically.

7. If you are measuring an offset line, enter the offset distances and the start point name. To enter a left horizontal offset, enter a negative offset distance or use the Left or Right pop-up menus.

8. Tap Measure to start recording data, and then move along the feature to be surveyed.

When using the Stop and go method, enter a value in the Stop time field for the period of time the antenna must be stationary before the receiver starts to measure the point. The user is deemed to be stationary when their velocity is less than 5cm/sec.

Note - To change the distance interval, time interval, or offset while measuring points, enter new values in the fields.

9. To stop measuring continuous points, tap End.

Tip - To store a position before the predefined conditions have been met, tap Store.

FastStatic Point

This type of point is measured in a

FastStatic survey.

Configure the preset times at which a FastStatic point is measured when you create or edit a FastStatic Survey Style - usually the default time is sufficient.

245

Note - If you do not record enough data, the points may not be successfully postprocessed.

The Trimble Survey Controller software terminates a FastStatic occupation automatically if the Auto store

point check box is selected and the specified occupation time is satisfied.

The default occupation times are satisfactory for most users. If you change an occupation time, choose a setting according to the number of satellites being tracked by that receiver. Remember that both receivers must track the same satellite at the same time for the data to be useful.

Tip - Use a mobile phone or a walkie-talkie radio to verify that both receivers are tracking the same satellites.

Changing the occupation times directly affects the outcome of a FastStatic survey. Any changes should increase this time rather than decrease it.

You can only measure a FastStatic point in a FastStatic survey.

Note - FastStatic surveys are postprocessed and do not need to be initialized.

To measure a FastStatic point:

1. Do one of the following:

♦

From the main menu, select Survey / Measure points.

♦

Tap Favorites and select Measure points.

2. Enter values in the Point name and Code fields (the Code field entry is optional).

3. Enter a value in the Antenna height field and make sure that the setting in the Measured to field is set appropriately.

4. Tap Measure to start measuring the point.

5. When the preset occupation time is reached, as shown in the following table, tap Store to store the point.

Receiver type 4 SVs 5 SVs 6+ SVs

Single-frequency 30 min 25 min 20 min

Dual-frequency 20 min 15 min 8 min

Tip - No satellite tracking is necessary between measuring points. You can turn off the equipment.

Observed Control Point

This is a previously configured method of measuring and storing a point. Configure observed control points when you create or edit a Survey Style. The point is stored with a search classification of Normal.

The Trimble Survey Controller software can terminate observed control point measurements and store the results automatically if the Auto store point check box is selected and the occupation times are satisfied. For

RTK surveys, the number of measurements and the horizontal and vertical precisions must also be satisfied.

The default setting for the Number of measurements field is 180. The extended occupation time suggests that this measurement type is ideally suited to points that will be used for control purposes.

246

Note - When the Auto store point check box is cleared, tap Store when it appears on the Enter button to store the point. The Enter softkey is blank until the specified occupation time has been met. To store a point before that time has elapsed, tap Enter. When you do this, the Trimble Survey Controller software asks you to confirm storing the point. Tap Yes to store the point.

Quality control information is automatically stored with each point:

•

Real-time observed control points can store QC1, QC1 & QC2, or QC1 & QC3 records.

•

Postprocessed observed control points only store QC1 records.

If the Topo point option is configured to perform 180 measurements, the positional result is similar to a point measured using the observed control point measurement type. Differences are:

• the default value in the Quality control field

• the observation class given by the office software when the point is downloaded

When the Trimble Survey Controller software measures an observed control point, it stores a point when the preset number of epochs has elapsed and the precisions have been attained.

To measure an observed control point:

1. Do one of the following:

♦

From the main menu, select Survey / Measure points.

♦

Tap Favorites and select Measure points.

2. Enter values in the Point name and Code fields (the Code field entry is optional), and select Observed

control point in the Type field.

3. Enter a value in the Antenna height field and make sure that the setting in the Measured to field is set appropriately.

4. Tap Measure to start recording data.

5. When the preset number of epochs and precisions are reached, tap Store to store the point.

Note - For an RTK survey, initialize the survey before starting to measure the point. For a Postprocessed

Kinematic survey, you can start measuring a point, but you cannot store it until you have initialized the survey.

RTK On Demand

If you are using an Internet connection to send RTK data from the base to the rover, then you can use Trimble

Survey Controller's RTK on Demand functionality to control the amount of data broadcast from the base receiver. You can request the base station to send data only when you require it. This will reduce the amount of data received by your cellular phone and may reduce costs from your cellular network service provider.

247

Once the RTK survey is running over an Internet connection, you can access the RTK on Demand controls by tapping the icon in the status bar.

When the survey is started, Trimble Survey Controller will default to Play mode, RTK data will be streamed continuously.

mode. When in Play

If you tap the softkey, your survey will go into Pause mode and data will only be streamed when required. Trimble Survey Controller will request data from the base station when initialization is lost, or when you choose to measure a point, or when you start continuous topo, or when you use the stakeout functionality.

As soon as the receiver has regained initialization, or the survey task is complete, then Trimble Survey

Controller will request the base station to stop streaming data.

If you tap the softkey then your survey will go into Stop mode and no RTK data will be streamed.

This can be used in situations where you do not wish to end your survey, but do not require the receiver to stay initialized until you are ready to start surveying again.

Hardware requirements

The RTK on Demand functionality requires an Internet connection at both the GPS base station and rover.

This means that you will require two cellular phones, either GPRS capable or GSM connected to a dial-up

Internet connection. Either Trimble Survey Controller is required to be at both the GPS base station and rover

(this means that you will require two Trimble Controllers running Trimble Survey Controller version 11.00 or later), or you must be connected to a Trimble GPSNet or GPSBase infrastructure system.

248

Survey - Integrated

Integrated Surveys

Using an Integrated Survey (IS) allows you to connect to both a GPS receiver and a conventional instrument at the same time.

You can perform an integrated survey using Trimble VX/S Series or Trimble 5600 instruments and RTK surveys.

For more information, see:

•

•

Starting an integrated survey

•

Switching between instruments

•

Ending an integrated survey

•

Using an IS rover survey rod

Configuring an integrated survey style

An integrated survey style is created by referencing a conventional survey style and an RTK survey style, and then providing additional information specific to the integrated survey.

To configure an integrated survey style:

1. From the main menu, select Configuration / Survey Styles and then tap New.

2. Enter the Style name, set the Style type to Integrated Surveying and then tap Accept.

3. Select the Conventional and GPS styles you want to reference for the integrated style and then tap

Accept.

To configure the

IS rover survey rod,

continue with the next step.

4. Tap Target options.

5. Select the IS rover check box and then enter the

Prism to antenna offset.

Note - When the IS rover option is enabled, the only way to change the GPS antenna height in an integrated survey is to use Target 1 and enter the height to the prism. The GPS antenna height is computed automatically using the Prism to antenna offset configured in the IS style.

Starting an integrated survey

There are a number of ways to start an integrated survey. Use the method that best suits the way you work:

•

Start a conventional survey and then start a GPS survey at a later time.

•

Start a GPS survey and then start a conventional survey at a later time.

•

Start an integrated survey. This starts a conventional survey and a GPS survey at the same time.

249

To start an integrated survey, first create an

integrated survey style,

and then select Survey / <integrated survey style name>.

To start a single survey, and then start an integrated survey at a later time, begin your first survey as usual and then select Survey / Integrated surveying. Only the styles that are configured in the integrated survey style are available in an integrated survey.

Tip - When using an integrated survey you can measure points using GPS during a Resection and Station

Setup Plus.

Switching between instruments

In an integrated survey, the controller is connected to both devices at the same time. This makes switching between instruments very quick.

To switch from one instrument to another, do one of the following:

•

Tap the Status line

•

Select Survey / Switch to <style name>

•

Tap Switch to and then select Switch to <style name>

•

On the TSC2 controller, customize the [Left App] button or the [Right App] button to Switch to

TS/GPS and then tap the [App] button.

In an integrated survey, identify the instrument that is currently 'active' by looking at the Status bar, the Status line, or the Enter softkey.

Active survey Example status line

Conventional HA:45°56'21" VA:87°32'34"

Enter softkey

GPS RTK:Fixed H:0.019 V:0.024 RMS:043

When you use the Trimble Survey Controller software in an integrated survey, there are some areas of functionality within the Trimble Survey Controller software where you cannot switch instruments. For example, you cannot switch instruments if the current screen is stakeout line or arc, or if you are in the stakeout points graphics screen.

For more information on how the different features behave, and the way to switch the feature to use the active instrument see the following sections:

Measure topo / Measure points

•

If you switch instruments during an integrated survey when you are using Measure topo

(conventional), the software automatically switches you to the Measure points (GPS) screen (and vice

• versa).

The point name defaults to the next available name.

•

The code defaults to the last stored code.

250

•

Switch instruments before you change the point name and code. If you enter a point name or code before switching instruments, they will not be the default after the switch.

Measure codes

•

When you switch instruments, the active instrument is used for the next observation.

Continuous topo

•

Only one Continuous topo survey is possible at one time.

•

You cannot switch the instrument used in Continuous topo while Continuous topo is running.

•

To change the instrument that is being used in Continuous topo, tap Esc to exit Continuous topo and

• then restart Continuous topo.

You can switch instruments if the Continuous topo screen is open but running in the background. If you switch instruments when the Continuous topo screen is running in the background, and you later make the Continuous topo screen the active screen, the Trimble Survey Controller software automatically switches to the instrument with which you started Continuous topo.

Stakeout Points

•

Only one Stakeout point survey is possible at one time.

•

You cannot switch the instrument used in Stakeout points when the Stakeout points graphics screen

• is displayed.

To change the instrument that is being used in Stakeout points, tap Esc to return to the Stake out point

• list, switch instruments and then tap Stakeout.

You can switch instruments if the Stakeout graphics screen is open but running in the background. If you switch instruments when the Stakeout graphics screen is running in the background, and you later make the Stakeout graphics screen the active screen, the Trimble Survey Controller software automatically switches to the instrument with which you started Stakeout points.

Stakeout Lines

•

Only one Stakeout line survey is possible at one time.

•

You cannot switch the instrument used in Stakeout lines when the Stakeout lines screen is displayed.

•

To change the instrument that is being used in Stakeout lines, tap Esc to exit Stakeout lines, switch

• instruments and then restart Stakeout lines.

You can switch instruments if the Stakeout lines screen is open but running in the background. If you switch instruments when the Stakeout lines screen is running in the background, and you later make the Stakeout lines screen the active screen, the Trimble Survey Controller software automatically switches to the instrument with which you started Stakeout lines.

Stakeout Arcs

•

Only one Stakeout arc survey is possible at one time.

•

You cannot switch the instrument used in Stakeout arcs when the Stakeout arcs screen is displayed.

•

To change the instrument that is being used in Stakeout arcs, tap Esc to exit Stakeout arcs, switch instruments and then restart Stakeout arcs.

251

•

You can switch instruments if the Stakeout arcs screen is open but running in the background. If you switch instruments when the Stakeout arcs screen is running in the background, and you later make the Stakeout arcs screen the active screen, the Trimble Survey Controller software automatically switches to the instrument with which you started Stakeout arcs.

Stakeout Alignments

•

Only one Stakeout alignment survey is possible at one time.

•

You cannot switch the instrument used in Stakeout alignments when the Stakeout alignments

•

graphics screen is displayed.

To change the instrument that is being used in Stakeout alignments, tap Esc to return to the Stake out

•

alignment screen, switch instruments and then tap Start.

Stakeout Roads

•

Only one Stakeout road survey is possible at one time.

•

You cannot switch the instrument used in Stakeout roads when the Stakeout roads graphics screen is

• displayed.

To change the instrument that is being used in Stakeout roads, tap Esc to return to the Stake out road

• screen, switch instruments and then tap Start.

Ending an integrated survey

To end an integrated survey, you can end each survey individually, or select End integrated survey to end the

GPS survey and the conventional survey at the same time.

IS rover - Integrated survey rod

When surveying with an integrated survey style you can use an IS rover survey rod.

For more information, see:

•

Configuring an IS rover

•

Using an IS rover survey rod

Configuring an IS rover

The IS rover survey rod is configured as part of the integrated survey style.

252

When you configure the IS rover survey rod, enter the Prism to antenna offset. The offset is measured from the center of the prism to the position on the GPS antenna. The position on the GPS antenna is defined in the

Rover options form of the GPS survey style which is referenced by the integrated survey style.

The following table shows the offset distance from the center of the prism to the Trimble R8 antenna:

Prism type

VX/S Series MultiTrack

VX/S Series 360°

RMT606

Offset measured to bottom of antenna mount

34 mm

57 mm

33 mm

Offset measured to center of bumper

90 mm

113 mm

87 mm

Note - If an incorrect antenna measurement method is set, the incorrect offset is applied to the GPS antenna heights.

Using an IS rover survey rod

In an integrated survey you must enable IS rover and use Target 1 to update the GPS height automatically.

When the IS rover option is enabled, a change to the conventional target height applies the Prism to antenna

offset configured in the IS style and automatically updates the GPS antenna height.

To change the IS rover height:

1. Ensure that IS rover is enabled in the IS style, and that the Prism to antenna offset has been correctly configured and applies to the antenna Type and Measured to setting configured in the RTK style.

2. Tap the target or antenna icon in the status bar.

♦

In a conventional survey, select Target 1.

♦

In a GPS survey, Target 1 is automatically selected for you.

3. Enter the Target height (the height to the center of the prism).

The updated height is not displayed in the Status bar until the target form is closed.

4. Tap Antenna to see the entered target height, style configured prism to antenna offset, and computed antenna height. This step is optional.

5. Tap Accept.

If you do not select the IS rover check box, changes to the target heights are not automatically applied to the

GPS antenna height.

This means that when you change the conventional target height, you must also change the GPS antenna height.

253

Survey - Stakeout

Stakeout - Configuring the Display Mode

The display varies depending on whether you are performing a

Conventional or

GPS survey.

Conventional Surveys

For a conventional survey the Stakeout graphical display

screen displays directions using the conventional instrument as a reference point.

For a conventional survey, you can configure the Stakeout directions and the Display mode of the Stakeout graphical display.

Stakeout directions allows you to configure the stakeout directions to be from an instrument perspective, target perspective, or automatic. Automatic configuration sets the stakeout directions automatically, based on whether you have a servo connection or a robotic connection to the instrument.

Display mode allows you to configure the graphical navigation display.

When the Display mode is set to Direction and distance, the navigation screen displays:

♦

A large arrow pointing in the direction you have to move. When you are close to the point, the arrow changes to the in/out and left/right directions, relative to the instrument.

When the Display mode is set to In/out and left/right, the navigation screen displays:

♦

In/out and left/right directions, with the conventional instrument as a reference point.

To configure the display:

1. From the main menu, select Configuration / Survey styles / <style name> / Stakeout.

2. Set the Stakeout directions:

♦

Automatic - navigation directions are from Instrument perspective (during a servo

♦ connection), or Target perspective (during a robotic survey).

Instrument perspective (standing behind the instrument) - in/out and left/right navigation directions given from an instrument perspective, looking from the instrument towards the

♦ target.

Target perspective (standing at the target) - in/out and left/right navigation directions given from a target perspective, looking from the target towards the instrument.

3. Set the Display mode:

♦

Direction and distance - navigate using the large arrow, similar to GPS stakeout.

When you are close to the point, the display automatically changes to the in/out and left/right

♦ display.

In/out and left/right - navigate using in/out and left/right directions, with the instrument as a reference point.

254

4. Choose a setting in the Deltas field. The options are:

♦

Distances - navigate to a point using distances only

♦

Delta grid - navigate to a point using delta grid values

♦

Station and offset - navigate to a point using station and offset when staking a line or arc.

When staking to the line or arc the station and offset view displays the Station, H.offset,

V.dist and the Grade.

When staking to the Station on the line / arc or the Station/offset from line / arc the view displays the Station, H.offset, V.dist, delta Station and delta H.offset.

5. Use the Distance tolerance field to specify the allowable error in distance. If the target is within this distance from the point, the graphical stakeout display indicates that the distance(s) is correct.

6. Use the Angle tolerance field to specify the allowable error in angle. If the conventional instrument is turned away from the point by less than this angle, the graphical stakeout display indicates that the angle is correct.

7. If a DTM file has been transferred into the Trimble Survey Controller software, you can select the

Display cut/fill to DTM check box, and the graphical display screen will display the cut or fill relative to that DTM. Use the DTM field to specify the name of the DTM to be used. If necessary, specify a vertical offset to raise or lower the DTM.

Alternatively, tap Options from the Stakeout screen to configure the settings for the current survey.

GPS Surveys

For a real-time GPS surveys, you can set the mode of the

Stakeout graphical display so that the point stays

fixed in the center of the screen, or so that your position stays fixed in the center of the screen.

To configure the display:

1. From the main menu, select Configuration / Survey styles / <style name> / Stakeout.

2. In the Display mode, select either Target centered, or Surveyor centered.

3. You can enter a value in the Zoom factor field. This is the amount that the display zooms in when you switch from Coarse mode to Fine mode while navigating to a point. The default value is 4.0. When you zoom in by this amount, the width of the graphical display corresponds to approximately one meter (or three feet).

4. Select the

Auto change to Fine

option to automatically change to fine mode when you get within 1 foot (0.3048m) of the point.

5. Choose a setting in the Deltas field. The options are:

♦

Azimuth and distance - navigate to a point using azimuth and distance

♦

Delta grid - navigate to a point using delta grid values

♦

Station and offset - navigate to a point using station and offset

When staking To the line or arc the station and offset view displays the Station, H.offset, V.dist and the Grade.

When staking to the Station on the line or arc, or the Station/offset from line or arc the view displays the Station, H.offset, V.dist, delta Station and delta H.offset.

255

6. If a DTM file has been transferred into the Trimble Survey Controller software you can select the

Alternatively, tap Options from the Stakeout screen to configure the settings for the current survey.

Stakeout - Using the Graphical Display

The graphical display in Stakeout helps you to navigate to a point. The display orientation assumes you are moving forwards at all times. The display varies depending on whether you are performing a

Conventional or

GPS

survey.

When you stake out a road, a

cross-section view is also available.

Conventional

To use the graphical display in a conventional survey:

If you are using the Direction and distance mode:

1. Hold the display screen in front of you as you walk forwards in the direction that the arrow is pointing. The arrow points in the direction of the point.

2. When you get to within 3 meters (10 feet) of the point, the arrow disappears, and the in/out and left/right directions appear, with the instrument as a reference point. Follow the instructions below to navigate in this mode.

If you are using the In/out and left/right mode:

1. The first display shows which way the instrument should be turned, the angle that the instrument should display and the distance from the last point staked to the point currently being staked.

2. Turn the instrument (two outline arrows will appear when it is on line), and direct the rod person on line.

If you are using a servo instrument, and the Servo auto turn field in the survey style is set to HA &

VA, or HA only the instrument automatically turns to the point.

If you are working robotically, or when the Servo auto turn field in the survey style is set to Off, the instrument does not turn automatically. To turn the instrument to the angle indicated on the screen, tap

Turn.

3. If the instrument is not in TRK mode, tap Measure to take a distance measurement.

4. The display shows how far the person holding the rod should move towards or away from the instrument.

5. Direct the person holding the rod, and take another distance measurement.

6. Repeat steps 2 - 5 until the point has been located (when four outline arrows are displayed), then

256

mark the point.

7. If a measurement to the target is within the angular and distance tolerances, tap Store at any time to accept the current measurement.

If the instrument is in TRK mode and you require a higher precision distance measurement, tap

Measure to take an STD measurement and then tap Store to accept that measurement.

To discard the STD measurement and return the instrument to TRK mode, tap Esc.

If you are operating a robotic instrument remotely from the target:

♦ the instrument automatically tracks the prism as it moves

♦ the instrument continuously updates the graphical display

♦ the graphical display is reversed and the arrows are shown from the target (prism) to the instrument

GPS

When you use the graphical display in a GPS survey to navigate to a point, the screen first displays a large navigation arrow when you are some distance away from the point ("coarse navigation mode") and then automatically changes to a bull's-eye target as you move in closer.

•

The arrow assumes that your are moving forward at all times.

•

The bull's eye target does not assume that your are moving forward.

To use the graphical display in a GPS survey:

1. Hold the display screen in front of you as you walk forwards in the direction that the arrow is pointing. The arrow points in the direction of the point that you intend to measure.

2. When you get to within 10 feet (3 meters) of the point, the arrow disappears and a bull's-eye target appears.

When the bull's-eye target is displayed, do not change your orientation. Keep facing in the same direction and only move forwards, backwards, left or right.

When you get even closer to the point, tap Fine to make the screen zoom in.

Select the

Auto change to fine option to automatically change to fine mode when you get within 1 foot

(0.3048m) of the point.

4. Continue moving forwards until the cross, representing your current position, covers the bull's-eye target, representing the point. Mark the point.

Stakeout - Options

Configure the stakeout settings when you create or edit a Survey Style.

Select Stakeout and set the

As-staked point details ,

Stakeout display mode , and

Available Station options.

257

The Available station option is only available in Road stakeout.

If you want a 5D string in a GENIO file to be treated as a 3D string, clear the Auto side slope check box. See

Stakeout GENIO roads.

If you do not want the total station EDM set to TRK mode when you enter stakeout, clear the Use TRK for

stakeout check box.

Alternatively, tap Options from the Stakeout screen to configure the settings for the current survey.

If you do not want the point removed from the stake out point list after it has been staked, clear the Remove

staked point from list check box.

As-Staked Point Details

Configure the As-staked point details either in the Stakeout option, when you create or edit a survey style, or by tapping Options in the Stakeout screen.

You can configure the View before storage

, Horizontal tolerance

Staked deltas format

As-staked name ,

As-staked code , and Store grid deltas .

View before storage and Horizontal tolerance

If you want to see the differences between the design point and the as-staked point before you store the point, select the View before storage check box and then choose one of these options:

•

To see the differences every time, set the Horizontal tolerance to 0.000 m.

•

To see the differences only if the tolerance is exceeded, set the Horizontal tolerance to 0.100 m.

Note - The Stake delta values are reported as differences from the measured/as-staked point to the design point.

User definable stakeout reports

The Trimble Survey Controller software supports user definable stakeout reports, which enable you to configure the display of staked information on the Confirm staked deltas screen that appears when you enable

View before storage.

User definable stakeout reports can offer the following benefits:

• important information can be displayed first

• the data can be ordered to suit the user's requirements

• information that is not required can be removed

• additional data can be computed for display, for example by applying construction offsets to reported

• values for point stakeout, the point design elevation can be edited after the stakeout measurement is

258

• completed for point stakeout, up to 10 extra design elevations with individual vertical offset values can be defined and edited, with the cut/fill to each extra design elevation being reported

Formatting of the staked deltas screen also supports the following settings:

• the size of the font for prompts

• the size of the font for reported values

• the color of the font for prompts

• the color of the font for reported values

• widescreen on or off

The content and format of the stakeout reports is controlled by XSLT style sheets. Translated default XSLT

Stakeout Style Sheet (*.sss) files are included with the language files, and accessed by the Trimble Survey

Controller software from the language folders. You can create new formats in the office and then use

Microsoft ActiveSync technology to copy them to the Trimble Data folder on the controller.

From the Staked deltas format field, select an appropriate display format.

The following list shows the translated stakeout reports that are supplied with the language files, and the support offered by those reports:

•

Point - Stake markup

♦

Provides a simplified stakeout display that presents the vertical distance (cut/fill) to the design point. The vertical distance to a DTM will also be displayed if applicable.

•

Point - Stake multiple elevs

♦

Provides a stakeout display that allows you to edit the point design elevation (the cut/fill value will be updated) and entry of up to two extra design elevations with associated vertical offsets and updated cut/fill values.

•

Line - Stake markup

♦

Provides a simplified stakeout display that presents the vertical distance (cut/fill) to the design position. The appropriate station and offset values are reported, based on the selected line stakeout method.

•

Arc - Stake markup

♦

•

DTM - Stake markup

♦

Provides a simplified stakeout display that presents the vertical distance (cut/fill) to the DTM being staked.

•

Road - Catch + offsets

♦

Provides details of all the standard road staked deltas plus a list of the horizontal and vertical distances to each of the cross-section positions from the staked offset position. The reported horizontal and vertical distances include the applied horizontal and vertical construction offsets.

•

Road - Stake markup

♦

Provides a simplified stakeout display that presents the vertical distance (cut/fill) to the road design position. Appropriate station and offset values and cross-section details (in the case of

259

catch point staking) are reported, based on the road stakeout method.

•

Road - XS details

♦

Provides all the standard road staked deltas details as well as a list of the cross-section elements (left and right) that define the design cross-section at the selected station.

Tip - When you use multiple Stakeout Style Sheet files, Trimble recommends that you set the Staked deltas format from the Configuration / Survey Styles menu, where you can configure unique formats for Points,

Lines, Arcs, DTMs, and Roads. You can also select the format within Options during stakeout.

Note - The development of the XSLT style sheets is an advanced procedure recommended for users with programming experience. For more information, please refer to the Trimble Survey Controller software CD.

As-staked name and As-staked code

You can set the name of the As-staked point to be one of the following:

• the next Auto point name

• the Design point name (not available for roads)

You can also set the code of the As-staked point to be one of the following:

•

Design name

•

Design code

•

Last code used

•

Design station and offset

The Description defaults as follows:

•

When staking a point, line or arc with descriptions, the description of the as-staked point will default to the description of the design entity unless the As-staked code is set to Last code used in which case

• the the last used description is used.

When staking a road the description will always be the last used independent of the the As-staked

code setting.

Store grid deltas

Set the Store grid deltas check box. Do one of the following:

•

Select the check box to display and store the delta northing, delta easting, and delta elevation during

• stakeout.

Clear the check box to display and store the deltas as a horizontal distance, vertical distance, and azimuth.

Note - If you use a user definable stakeout report, the Store grid deltas option is not used, unless it is referenced in your report.

260

Stakeout - Points

To stake out a point:

1. From the map, select the point(s) to be staked out. Tap Stakeout.

If you have selected more than one point from the map for staking out, the Stake out points screen appears. Go to the next step. If you have selected one point from the map, go to step 4.

Tip - To stake out a point, double tap it on the map.

2. The Stake out points screen lists all points selected for stakeout. To add more points to the list, do one of the following:

♦

Tap Map and then select the required points from the map. Tap Stakeout to return to the Stake

♦

out points screen.

Tap Add.

Choose the method to select points:

- Use the Select from list option to select from a list of all points in the Trimble Survey

Controller database.

- Use the Select from file option to select points in a linked file

Notes

◊

When you add points to the stakeout list using the Select from file option, you can now add them from the linked file even if the point in the linked file already exists in the current job. The Select from file option is the only way you can stake a point from

◊ a linked file when a point of the same name exists in the current job.

If a linked job contains two points of the same name, the point with the higher class is displayed.

3. To select a point for stakeout, highlight the point from the Stake out points screen and tap Stakeout.

The Stake out point screen appears.

4. In the Stake field, select one of the following methods for staking out the point:

♦

To the point - stake out the point with directions from your current position.

♦

From fixed point - stake out the point with cross-track information and directions from another point. Enter a point name in the From point field. Select from a list, key in, or

♦ measure this value.

From start position - stake out the point with cross-track information and directions from the

♦ current position when you start to navigate.

From last point staked - stake out the point with cross-track information and directions from the last point that was staked out and measured. The staked point is used, not the design point.

To stake out from the current position, access the From point field and tap Null.

Note - The cross-track function creates a line between the point to be staked out and one of the following: a fixed point, the start position, or the last point staked. The Trimble Survey

261

Controller software displays this line, and an extra field in the graphical stakeout screen gives the offset to the line. The extra field is Go left or Go right .

5. In a GPS survey, enter a value in the Antenna/Target height field and make sure the setting in the

Measured to field is set appropriately. The graphical display screen appears.

In a conventional survey, tap the Target icon to change target details.

The screen displays the angle to which you should turn the instrument and the distance from the instrument to the point, together with a graphical representation of this.

Locate the point using the graphical display, and then mark it.

If required, edit the design elevation.

Note - The design elevation appears in the bottom right corner of the navigation window. To edit the elevation, tap the arrow. To reload an edited elevation, select Reload original elevation from the pop-up menu in the Design elevation field.

If the navigation window contains five rows of navigation information, the label for the Design

elevation field is not shown.

7. When the point has been marked, you can measure it as an as-staked point by tapping Accept or

Measure.

Stakeout - Lines

To stake out a line in an RTK or conventional survey:

1. Do one of the following:

♦

From the map, select two points to define a line, tap and hold and then select Stake out line.

♦

From the map, select the line to be staked out. Tap Stakeout, or tap and hold on the map and

♦ then select Stake out line from the shortcut menu.

From the main menu, select Survey / Stakeout / Lines. Enter the name of the line to be staked out.

Tip - In the Line name field (or the Start point or the End point field) use the advanced pop-up arrow to select staking either a keyed-in line or one defined from two points.

2. In the Stake field, select one of the following options:

•

To the line

•

Station on the line

•

Station/offset from line

•

Slope from line

3. Enter the Antenna/Target height, the value of the station to be staked out (if any), and any further details, such as horizontal and vertical offsets. Tap Start.

4. Use the

graphical display

to navigate to the point.

262

5. Mark the point.

6. When the point has been marked, tap Measure to open the Measure points screen. Measure the point as an as-staked point.

To the line

Use this option, as shown in the diagram below, to stake out points on a defined line starting with the closest point (1) from your current position (2).

To stake out a line using the To the line method:

1. Do one of the following:

♦

From the map, select the line to be staked out. Tap Stakeout, or tap and hold on the map and

♦ select Stake out line from the shortcut menu.

From the main menu, select Survey / Stakeout / Lines. Enter the line name.

Tip - To stake out a line, double tap it on the map.

2. In the Stake field, select To the line.

3. Enter the antenna/target height and tap Start.

4. Use the graphical display to navigate to the point.

5. Mark the point and tap Measure to measure it.

Station on the line

Use this option, as shown in the diagram below, to stake out stations (1) on a defined line at the stationing intervals (2) along the line.

To stake out a line using the Station on the line method:

1. Do one of the following:

♦

From the map, select the line to be staked out. Tap Stakeout, or tap and hold on the map and

♦ select Stake out line from the shortcut menu.

From the main menu, select Survey / Stakeout / Lines. Enter the line name.

2. In the Stake field, select Station on the line.

3. Enter the antenna/target height and the station to be staked out and tap Start.

4. Use the graphical display to navigate to the point.

5. Mark the point and tap Measure to measure it.

263

Station/offset from line

Use this option, as shown in the diagram below, to stake out points (1) perpendicular to stations (3) on a defined line (2) and offset to the left or right by a set distance (4).

To stake out a line using the Station/offset from line method:

1. Do one of the following:

♦

From the map, select the line to be staked out. Tap Stakeout, or tap and hold on the map and

♦ select Stake out line from the shortcut menu.

From the main menu, select Survey / Stakeout / Lines. Enter the line name.

2. In the Stake field, select Station/offset from line.

3. Enter the antenna/target height and the station to be staked out.

4. Specify the Horizontal offset (a negative value is left of the line) and the Vertical offset and tap Start.

5. Use the graphical display to navigate to the point.

6. Mark the point and tap Measure to measure it.

Slope from line

Use this option, as shown in the diagram below, to stake out points on surfaces (2), at different defined grades

(3), either side of the defined line (cross section =1). See the diagram below.

To stake out a line using the Slope from line method:

1. Do one of the following:

♦

From the map, select the line to be staked out. Tap Stakeout, or tap and hold on the map and

♦ select Stake out line from the shortcut menu.

From the main menu, select Survey / Stakeout / Lines. Enter the line name.

2. In the Stake field, select Slope from line.

264

Use the Slope left field and the Slope right field to define the type of grade in one of the following ways:

♦ horizontal and vertical distance

♦ grade and slope distance

♦ grade and horizontal distance

3. Enter the antenna or target height, specify the grade of the left and right slopes and tap Start.

4. Use the graphical display to navigate to the point.

5. Mark the point and tap Measure to measure it.

At any point on the surface, the display shows the closest station, the Horizontal offset, and the

Vertical distance as a cut (4) or a fill (5).

Tip - When selecting a line or arc to stakeout, tap near the end of the line or arc that you want to designate as the start of the line or arc. Arrows are then drawn on the line or arc to indicate the direction.

If the direction of the line or arc is incorrect, tap the line or arc to deselect it and then tap it at the correct end to reselect the line or arc in the direction required.

Note - The offset directions are not swapped when the line direction is reversed.

Stakeout - Arcs

Follow these steps to stake out an arc in an RTK or conventional survey:

1. Do one of the following:

♦

From the map, select the arc to be staked out. Tap Stakeout, or tap and hold on the map and

♦ select Stakeout from the shortcut menu.

From the main menu, select Survey / Stakeout / Arcs. Enter the name of the arc to be staked out.

Tip To stake out an arc, double tap it on the map.

2. In the Stake field, select one of the following options:

♦

To the arc

♦

Station on the arc

♦

Station/offset from arc

♦

Slope from arc

♦

Intersect point of arc

♦

Center point of arc

265

3. Enter the antenna/target height and the value of the station to be staked out (if any).

4. Enter any further details, such as horizontal and vertical offsets, and tap Start.

5. Use the

graphical display

to navigate to the point.

6. Mark the point.

7. When the point is marked, tap Measure to open the Measure points screen. Measure the point as an as-staked point.

To the arc

Use this option, as shown in the diagram below, to stake out points on a defined arc, starting with the closest point (1) from your current position (2).

To stake out an arc using the To the arc method:

1. Do one of the following:

♦

From the map, select the arc to be staked out. Tap Stakeout, or tap and hold on the map and

♦ select Stakeout from the shortcut menu.

From the main menu, select Survey / Stakeout / Arcs. Enter the arc name.

2. In the Stake field, select To the arc.

3. Enter the antenna/target height and then tap Start.

4. Use the graphical display to navigate to the point.

5. Mark the point and tap Enter to measure it.

Station on the arc

Use this option, as shown in the diagram below, to stake out points (1) on a defined arc at the stationing intervals (2) along the arc.

To stake out an arc using the Station on the arc method:

1. Do one of the following:

♦

From the map, select the arc to be staked out. Tap Stakeout or tap and hold on the map and

♦ select Stakeout from the shortcut menu.

From the main menu, select Survey / Stakeout / Arcs. Enter the arc name.

2. In the Stake field, select Station on the arc.

3. Enter the antenna/target height and the station to be staked out and tap Enter.

4. Use the graphical display to navigate to the point.

5. Mark the point and tap Measure to measure it.

266

Station/offset from arc

Use this option, as shown in the diagram below, to stake out points (1) perpendicular to stations (3) on a defined arc (2) and offset to the left or right by a specified distance (4).

To stakeout an arc using the Station/offset from arc method:

1. Do one of the following:

♦

From the map, select the arc to be staked out. Tap Stakeout, or tap and hold on the map and

♦ select Stakeout from the shortcut menu.

From the main menu, select Survey / Stakeout / Arcs. Enter the arc name.

2. In the Stake field, select Station/offset from arc.

3. Enter the antenna/target height and the station to be staked out.

4. Specify the Horizontal offset (a negative value is left of the arc) and the Vertical offset and tap Start.

5. Use the graphical display to navigate to the point.

6. Mark the point and tap Measure to measure it.

Slope from arc

Use this option, as shown in the diagram below, to stake out points on surfaces (2), at different defined grades

(3) either side of the defined arc (cross section=1).

To stake out an arc using the Slope from arc method:

1. Do one of the following:

♦

From the map, select the arc to be staked out. Tap Stakeout, or tap and hold on the map and

♦ select Stakeout from the shortcut menu.

From the main menu, select Survey / Stakeout / Arcs. Enter the arc name.

2. In the Stake field, select Slope from arc.

3. Enter the antenna/target height and tap Start.

4. Use the graphical display to navigate to the point.

267

5. Mark the point and tap Measure to measure it.

At any point on the surface the graphical display shows the closest station, the Horizontal offset and the

Vertical distance as a cut (4) or a fill (5).

Intersect point of arc

Use this option as shown in the diagram below, to stake out the Intersection point (1) of an arc (2).

To stake out an arc using the Intersect point of arc method:

1. Do one of the following:

♦

From the map, select the arc to be staked out. Tap Stakeout, or tap and hold on the map and

♦ select Stakeout from the shortcut menu.

From the main menu, select Survey / Stakeout / Arcs. Enter the arc name.

2. In the Stake field, select Intersect point of arc.

3. Enter the antenna/target height and tap Start.

4. Use the graphical display to navigate to the point.

5. Mark the point and tap Measure to measure it.

Center point of arc

Use this option, as shown in the diagram below, to stake out the Center point (1) of a defined arc (2).

To stake out an arc using the Center point of arc method:

1. Do one of the following:

♦

From the map, select the arc to be staked out. Tap Stakeout, or tap and hold on the map and

♦ select Stakeout from the shortcut menu.

From the main menu, select Survey / Stakeout / Arcs. Enter the arc name.

2. In the Stake field, select Center point of arc.

268

Use the Slope left field and the Slope right field to define the type of grade in one of the following ways:

♦ horizontal and vertical distance

♦ grade and slope distance

♦ grade and horizontal distance

3. Enter the antenna/target height and tap Start.

4. Use the graphical display to navigate to the point.

5. Mark the point and tap Measure to measure it.

If the direction of the line or arc is incorrect, tap the line or arc to deselect it and then tap it at the correct end to reselect the line or arc in the direction required.

Note - The offset directions are not swapped when the line direction is reversed.

Stakeout - Alignments

The Trimble Survey Controller software supports offsetting and stakeout of alignments, which are sometimes known as polylines.

Alignments always have a horizontal component; the vertical component is optional. If an alignment is created using entities that have elevations, the alignment will have a vertical component.

You can select or create and stake alignments using one of the following methods:

•

Key in point name ranges.

•

Select one or more polylines in graphical view from a DXF/SHP file.

•

Select a series of points in the map.

•

The points can be from the current job, a linked job, or a linked csv file.

Select a combination of points, lines, arcs, polylines, or alignments in the map.

You can edit alignments using Key in / Roads. The horizontal and vertical components are edited individually.

If you edit the horizontal alignment, you must check if the vertical alignment also needs editing.

To create and stake an alignment by keying in a point name range:

269

1. From the main menu, select Survey / Stakeout / Alignments.

You can stake an existing alignment or key in a new alignment. If the Point range field is not visible, tap New to enter a new alignment.

2. Enter the point names that define the alignment.

The following name range techniques are supported:

Enter

1,3,5

1-10

1,3,5-10

1(2)3

1(2,L)3

Result

Creates a line between points 1 to 3 to 5

Creates lines between all points from 1 through 10

Creates a line between points 1 to 3, to 5, and 5 through 10

Creates an arc between points 1 and 3, through point 2

2 (Radius point), L (left) or R (right)

Creates a Left hand arc between points 1 and 3, with point 2 as the radius point

1(100,L,S)3

1 to 3, radius=100, L (left) or R (right), L (large) or S (small)

Creates a Left hand Small arc between points 1 and 3 with a radius of 100

3. To store the alignment, enable the Store alignment check box, enter an Alignment name, enter a Code, if required, and then tap Next.

This takes you to stakeout.

Alignments are stored as RXL files. If you save the alignment, you can easily stake it again, view it in the map, and share it with other jobs and with other controllers.

Tip - To offset the alignment, tap Offset. If the Store alignment check box is enabled, tap Next to store the alignment and go to stakeout. To store the alignment without going to stakeout, tap Store.

4. Select a Station to stake and then specify the Station interval.

You can select a station using one of the following methods:

♦

Select from the list in the Stationing field pop-up menu.

♦

Key in a value.

♦

Tap Sta+ or Sta- to select the next/previous station.

5. To change target or antenna heights, tap the target icon in the status bar.

6. Select Stakeout and then use the graphical display to navigate to the point.

7. Mark the point and tap Measure to measure it.

To stake a polyline from a DXF/SHP file:

1. From the main menu, tap Map. Tap the up arrow to access more softkeys and then tap Layers.

2. Tap the file name once to make it visible; tap it again to make it selectable.

270

Tap to expand the layers within a DXF file and to allow individual selection of layers to be visible and selectable.

3. Tap Accept to confirm the selection and return to the map.

4. Tap the polyline you want to stake.

Tap the end of the polyline that you want to be the start of the polyline.

5. To stake the polyline/alignment:

♦

Tap Stakeout, or tap and hold on the map screen, and then select Stake out alignment.

♦

This allows you to stake the polyline without storing the alignment.

Tap and hold on the map screen and then select Create/Offset alignment. Complete the fields as required and then tap Next. You can then do one or more of the following:

◊ stake the polyline

◊ store the polyline as an alignment

◊ offset and stake the alignment

◊ store the offset alignment

◊ store the offset alignment and store node points at vertices

◊ stake the alignment or offset alignment

You can stake a polyline directly from a DXF/SHP file, but all polylines are converted to alignments for stakeout and when saved to the controller.

6. Select a Station to stake and then specify the Station interval.

You can select a station by one of the following methods:

♦

Select from the list in the Stationing field pop-up menu.

♦

Key in a value.

♦

Tap Sta+ or Sta- to select the next/previous station.

7. To change target or antenna heights, tap the target icon in the status bar.

8. Select Stakeout and then use the graphical display to navigate to the point.

9. Mark the point and tap Measure to measure it.

To stake an alignment from the map:

1. From the main menu, tap Map. Tap the up arrow to display more softkeys and then tap Layers.

2. Tap the file name once to make it visible, tap it again to make it selectable.

3. Tap Accept to confirm the selection and return to the map.

4. Tap the alignment you want to stake.

The direction of an alignment and a Trimble road is defined when it is created; it cannot be changed.

5. To stake the alignment:

♦

Tap Stakeout, or tap and hold on the map screen, and then select Stake out alignment.

♦

This takes you directly to Stake out alignment.

Tap and hold on the map screen and then select Create/Offset alignment. Complete the fields as required and then tap Next. You can then do one or more of the following:

271

◊ stake the polyline

◊ store the polyline as an alignment

◊ offset and stake the alignment

◊ store the offset alignment

◊ store the offset alignment and store node points at vertices

◊ stake the alignment or offset alignment

6. Select a Station to stake and then specify the Station interval.

You can select a station by one of the following methods:

♦

Select from the list in the Stationing field pop-up menu.

♦

Key in a value.

♦

Tap Sta+ or Sta- to select the next/previous station.

7. To change target or antenna heights, tap the target icon in the status bar.

8. Select Stakeout and then use the graphical display to navigate to the point.

9. Mark the point and tap Measure to measure it.

Offsetting alignments

You can create an offset alignment from a keyed-in alignment, an alignment saved as an RXL file, or a polyline from a DXF/SHP file.

When creating an offset alignment, you can stake the alignment without saving it, or you can give the alignment a name and then save the offset alignment as an RXL file. You can also create and save node points at the vertices of the horizontal alignment.

To offset and stake an alignment:

1. From the main menu, select Survey / Stakeout / Alignments.

You can select an existing alignment or key in a new alignment.

1. To select an existing alignment, tap the alignment name (if the Select an alignment screen is displayed). If the Point range field is displayed, tap Select to view the alignments already on the controller.

2. To key in a new alignment, enter the point names that define the alignment (if the Key in

alignment screen is displayed). If the Select an alignment screen is displayed, tap New to enter the point range.

For more information, see the section

above.

2. To offset an alignment, tap Offset.

3. Enter the offset distance.

To offset to the left, enter a negative value.

4. To store the offset alignment, enable the Store alignment check box, enter an Alignment name, enter a

Code, if required, and then tap Next. The alignment is stored as an RXL file.

272

5. To store node points at the vertices of the offset alignment, enable the Store points at nodes check box, enter a Start point name, enter a Code, if required, and then tap Next.

Selecting Next stores the alignment, if the Store alignment check box is enabled, and takes you to stakeout. To store an alignment without going to stakeout, tap Store.

6. Select a Station to stake, and specify the Station interval.

You can select a station by one of the following methods:

♦

Select from the list in the Stationing field pop-up menu.

♦

Key in a value.

♦

Tap Sta+ or Sta- to select the next/previous station.

5. To change target or antenna heights, tap the target icon in the status bar.

6. Select Stakeout and then use the graphical display to navigate to the point.

7. Mark the point and tap Measure to measure it.

Station abbreviations

The Trimble Survey Controller software uses the following abbreviations in the Stationing field pop-up menu.

Abbreviation

CS Curve to spiral

Meaning

Point of curvature (Tangent to curve)

Point of intersection

Point of tangent (Curve to tangent)

Alignment start

Alignment end

Spiral to curve

Vertical curve high point

Abbreviation

VCE

VCS

VPI

Meaning

Spiral to spiral

Spiral to tangent

Tangent to spiral

Vertical curve end

Vertical curve start

Vertical point of intersection

Regular sections

Vertical curve low point

Stakeout - Digital Terrain Models (DTM)

A Digital Terrain Model is an electronic representation of a 3D surface. The Trimble Survey Controller software supports gridded and triangulated DTMs.

When you specify a DTM, you can view the cut and fill relative to the DTM. You must define a projection and datum transformation before you use a DTM in a GPS or conventional survey.

273

When a DTM is enabled in the Map, a color gradient shows the elevation changes. To disable the color gradient and show only an outline of the DTM, go to Layers / Options and then clear the Display color

gradient check box.

To stake out a DTM:

1. Transfer a DTM file into the Trimble Survey Controller software then select Survey / Stakeout /

DTMs.

2. Select the file to be used.

3. If necessary, specify a vertical offset to raise or lower the DTM.

4. To change target or antenna heights, tap the target icon in the status bar.

If the target or antenna height have not been defined, the elevation and cut/fill will be null (?).

5. Tap Start. The stakeout

graphical display

screen appears, displaying the coordinates of the current position and the vertical distance above (cut) or below (fill) the DTM.

Note - Unless you are using a conventional instrument that supports tracking (for example, a Trimble

5600), the values appear only after you have taken a distance measurement.

When staking out the DTM, if you are outside the extent of the DTM or in a "hole", the DTM elevation and cut/fill will be null (?).

To show the cut/fill to a DTM when staking out a point, line, arc, or road:

1. Tap Options in the Stakeout screen.

2. Select the Display cut/fill to DTM check box and specify the model.

Note - This does not apply to the Slope from line or Slope from arc stake methods.

To show the cut/fill to a DTM in the map:

1. Transfer a DTM file to the appropriate project folder on the controller.

2. From the main menu, tap Map. Tap the up arrow to display more softkeys and then tap Layers.

3. Tap the DTM file once to select the file and view it in the map; tap the DTM file name again to make it active. Tap Accept to return to the map.

When the DTM is active and the map has a position on the DTM, the DTM elevation, and the vertical distance above (cut) or below (fill) the DTM appear in the map screen.

4. If necessary, specify a vertical offset to raise or lower the DTM.

The vertical offset can be configured in Layers / Options when you select the DTM file. When defined, the vertical offset also appears in the Map of current job.

5. To change target or antenna heights, tap the target icon in the status bar.

If the target or antenna height have not been defined, the elevation and cut/fill will be null (?).

274

Stakeout - Roads

The Trimble Survey Controller software supports stakeout for three road formats:

•

Trimble

roads

•

Roads derived from a

GENIO file

•

Roads derived from a

LandXML

file

Road files are not job-specific. All road files stored in a project folder are available to all jobs in that same project folder.

For functions such as editing, displaying in the map, and stake out, all road files must be in the same folder as the current job.

Trimble roads

Trimble roads can be:

•

Keyed in using Key in Roads.

•

Uploaded from Trimble RoadLink software (a module of the Trimble Geomatics Office software).

•

Uploaded via Trimble Link from a number of third party design packages including Autodesk Land

•

Desktop, Autodesk Civil 3D, Bentley Inroads, and Bentley Geopak.

Imported as a DC file.

Keyed-in roads are stored as 'road name'.rxl files in the current project folder.

For information on how to key in a road, see Roads, and

Templates.

When a job that contains a road is uploaded to the Trimble Survey Controller software, the road is removed from the job and a new file is created. This new file defines the road, it is renamed with the name of the road and the job, and has the filename extension ".rxl". The RXL file is saved to the same project folder as the job.

If there is a road of the same name in this folder, it is overwritten by the uploaded road file.

When a DC file that contains a road is copied to the Trimble Survey Controller software and then converted to a job, a new file that defines the road is created and renamed with the name of the road and the job, and the filename extension RXL. If an RXL file of the same name exists the RXL file has "(1)" added to the name. If the DC file is converted a second time, the resulting RXL file has "(2)" added to the file name, and so on, each time that file is converted.

For more information on how to transfer files, see

Transferring Files between the Controller and the Office

Computer

For more information on staking Trimble roads, see

Staking Trimble roads.

GENIO files

GENIO files that define a road can be exported from a number of third party road design software packages,

275

including MX and

12D Model.

The file extension for the GENIO file must be *.CRD, *.INP, or *.MOS. Files with the extension MOS are exported from

12D Model.

For more information on staking roads from GENIO files, see

Staking roads from GENIO files.

LandXML files

LandXML files that define a road can be exported from a number of third-party road design software packages.

For more information on staking roads from LandXML files, see Staking roads from LandXML files.

Road stakeout details that apply to all three road formats

The Trimble Survey Controller software treats all road distances, including Stationing and Offset values, as grid distances. The value in the Distances field (accessed by selecting Files / Properties of current job - Cogo

settings) has no effect on the road definition or the way road distances are displayed.

If a ground coordinate system is defined in either the Trimble Geomatics Office or Trimble Survey Controller software, then the grid coordinates are, in effect, also ground coordinates.

Go Forward/Go Backward directions

As shown in the diagram below, the values in the Go Forward/Go Backward (1) and Go Right/Go Left (2) fields in the graphical display are relative to the cross-section of the point that you are staking out. They are

not relative to the current direction of travel, or to the current stationing. The direction of increasing stationing is shown by (3).

Target in the graphical display

As shown in the diagram below, the bull's-eye symbol in the graphical display also shows the road-space coordinate frame. The longer line (1) on the symbol shows the direction of increasing stationing and the shorter line (2) shows the direction of increasing offset (the right side of the road).

276

Exporting GENIO files from 12D Model

To export a road as a GENIO file from 12D Model:

1. Start 12D Model and select a project.

2. Select File I/O / Data output - GENIO.

3. From the Write GENIO File for dialog, select the alignment string as the data to write.

4. Enter a file name.

5. Set the Alignment dimension field to 6D.

6. Select the 77 Format check box.

7. Write the file but do not select Finish.

8. Select the remaining strings that define the road as the data to write.

9. Retain the file name used to write the alignment string.

10. Set the Alignment dimension field to 3D.

11. Write the file and then select Yes to append to the end of the existing file.

12. Select Finish.

Tip - Use the filter option to aid string selection.

Staking Trimble Roads

The Trimble Survey Controller software enables you to stake out a Trimble road by the following methods:

Station and offset

Position on road

Nearest offset

Side slope from alignment

Only the road files in the current project folder are available for stake out.

Note - You must specify a coordinate system before you can stake out roads with the Trimble Survey

Controller software.

277

Warning - Do not stake out points and then change the coordinate system or perform a calibration. If you do, these points will be inconsistent with the new coordinate system and any points computed or staked out after the change.

Trimble roads - Station and offset

To stake out by station and offset in a Trimble road when you perform an RTK survey:

1. From the main menu, select Survey / Stakeout / Roads.

2. Highlight the road name and tap Stakeout.

Tip - If you are warned that the road is incomplete or invalid return to

To select the point to be staked out, enter values in the Station and Offset fields.

road. Open each component defining the road and tap Accept. This will validate the component and report any errors in the definition. Use the editing functionality to resolve the error.

3. In the Stake field, select Station and offset.

4. Enter a value in the Antenna/Target height field and make sure that the Measured to field is set correctly.

The Code field displays the code of the offset to be staked out. The Trimble Survey Controller software uses the code from the template definition for the selected offset. When the offset is 0.000 m, the code defaults to CL.

6. To edit the design elevation, tap the arrow. To reload an edited elevation, select Reload original

elevation from the pop-up menu in the Design elevation field.

Note - If the position that you select for stakeout has no elevation, the Design elevation field becomes available. Enter an elevation into this field.

7. If required, enter values in the

fields.

8. Select Start and use the graphical display to navigate to the point.

9. Tap XS to view the

To define a cross slope, see

If you are staking to a catch point

If the road consists of a horizontal and vertical alignment only, the V. dist value reports the vertical distance to the centerline.

12.

with construction offsets, navigate to the catch point and then tap

Apply to add the construction offsets. You are prompted to apply the offsets from your current position. If you are not on the catch position, select No, navigate to the catch position and then tap

Apply again.

If you want to store the catch position and the construction offset, see

check boxes in Available Stations, accessed from the Options softkey in Stake out road.

278

Select XS for further graphical navigation. The construction offsets are indicated by green lines with the smaller single circle indicating the calculated catch position and the double circle indicating the selected position adjusted for the specified construction offset(s). The construction offsets are only displayed after you have applied them.

13. Mark the point with a stake.

14. When the point has been marked, you can measure it as an As-staked point by tapping Enter to go into the Stakeout / Point screen.

If a road has a horizontal and vertical alignment, but has no templates, all offset points display a null (?) value in the V. dist field during stakeout. If a road definition is defined only as a horizontal alignment, you can only stake it out in two dimensions. The horizontal and vertical alignments of a road do not necessarily start and end at the same stationing. When they start and end at different stationing, you can only stake out points in three dimensions if their stations lie within the horizontal alignment.

Stakeout - Available Stations

Note - This function is not available for roads derived from GENIO or LandXML files.

280

When using Trimble roads, to configure the stations available for the Stations field, select the appropriate

Select one of the following check boxes to make the appropriate stations available:

1. Regular Sections (stations defined by the station interval)

2. Horiz. Curve (key stations defined by the horizontal alignment)

3. Vert. Curve (key stations defined by the vertical alignment)

4. Template (stations where templates have been assigned)

5. Super/Widen (stations where superelevation and widening has been assigned)

Selecting a New Offset for a Side Slope

Note - This function is not available for roads derived from GENIO or LandXML files.

For Trimble roads, if the designed road does not fit the field conditions well, you can select a new offset for the side slope. The following diagram shows a typical example of where you might use this option.

Key to the above diagram.

1 - Design side slope

2 - New catch position defined by the slope of the previous element (A - B)

3 - New catch position defined by the design cut slope value

4 - New catch point position defined by the slope of the next element (B - C)

5 - Side slope offset is moved from offset C to offset B to avoid an unwanted fill zone

To select a new side slope offset:

1. From the main menu, select Survey / Stakeout Roads.

2. Highlight the road name and tap Stakeout.

3. From the pop-up menu in the Offset field, select the Select new offset for side slope option. Select a new offset. You can not select offset 0.000 or the Side Slope.

Note - Select the offset immediately preceding a side slope (the hinge position of the original side slope) if you only want to edit the side slope values.

4. The Side slope definition group appears, showing the as-designed values for the selected station. You can edit these values if required.

281

5. If required, enter values in the

fields.

6. Select Start and use the graphical display to navigate to the point.

In some situations, it may be preferable to adjust the cut or fill slope value to that of the next or previous template element. See 5 in the diagram above for a typical example.

To edit the slope value to that of the next or previous template element:

1. Access the Side slope definition group

2. In the pop-up menu in either the Cut slope field or the Fill slope field, select Next element slope or

Previous element slope.

The Slope field updates with the appropriate slope value.

Notes

•

The next or previous element slope options are available only if the next or previous elements exist.

•

In the Cut slope field, the options are available only if the next or previous slope values are positive,

• that is, if they define a cut slope.

In the Fill slope field, the options are available only if the next or previous slope values are negative, that is, if they define a fill slope.

Position relative to a Trimble road

To determine your current position relative to a Trimble road:

1. From the main menu, select Survey / Stakeout / Roads.

2. Highlight the road name and tap Stakeout.

Tip - If you are warned that the road is incomplete or invalid return to

road. Open each component defining the road and tap Accept. This will validate the component and report any errors in the definition. Use the editing functionality to resolve the error.

3. In the Stake field, select Position on road.

4. Enter a value in the Antenna/Target height field and make sure that the Measured to field is set correctly.

5. If there is a value in the V.Offset field, the Trimble Survey Controller software reports your position relative to the design, as adjusted by the specified vertical offset:

♦

A negative value offsets the design vertically down, a positive value up.

Note - The V.Offset value specified here is not applied to a DTM surface.

6. Tap Start. The graphical stakeout screen appears.

The graphical display in the plan view shows your current position relative to the road. The display includes the offset from the centerline and your current elevation. The right side of the screen reports

282

your current position relative to the road in terms of station, offset, and vertical distance to the road surface.

7. Tap XS to view the

You can measure your current position as an As-staked point by tapping Enter to go into the Stake

out point screen.

Note - If you are using a conventional instrument, the road values only appear after you take a distance measurement.

If your current position is more than 30 meters from the road centerline, the graphical display navigates you to a position on the road centerline. This is calculated by projecting your current position at right angles to the centerline.

If the road consists of only a horizontal and vertical alignment the V.dist value will report the vertical distance to the centerline.

Nearest offset

To stake relative to an offset for a Trimble road:

1. From the main menu, select Survey / Stakeout / Roads.

2. Highlight the road name and tap Stakeout.

Tip - If you are warned that the road is incomplete or invalid return to

To choose the offset to stake out, enter a value in the Offset field.

road. Open each component defining the road and tap Accept. This will validate the component and report any errors in the definition. Use the editing functionality to resolve the error.

3. In the Stake field, select Nearest offset.

4. Enter a value in the Antenna/Target height field and make sure that the Measured to field is set correctly.

The Code field displays the code of the offset to be staked out. Trimble Survey Controller uses the code from the template definition for the selected offset. When the offset is 0.000 m, the code defaults to CL.

6. If required, enter values in the

horizontal construction offset by your current position. See: Construction offsets for details.

fields.

Tip - For Trimble roads where an offset other than Nearest has been selected you can define a

7. To navigate to the selected offset, select Start and then use the graphical display.

8. Tap XS to view the

283

To define a cross slope, see

If you are staking to a catch point

with construction offsets, navigate to the catch point first and then tap Apply to add the construction offsets. You are prompted to apply the offsets from your current position. If you are not on the catch position, select No, navigate to the catch position and then tap

Apply again.

If you want to store the catch position and the construction offset, see

Construction offsets

10. Mark the point with a stake.

11. When the point has been marked, you can measure it as an As-staked point by tapping Enter to go into the Stakeout / Point screen.

Note - If you are using a conventional instrument, the road values only appear after you take a distance measurement.

The graphical display in the plan view shows your current position relative to the selected offset and also reports the offset from your current position to the centerline and your current elevation. The right side of the screen reports your current position in terms of station, offset to the selected offset, and vertical distance from your current position to the selected offset.

Selecting an offset

You can select an offset by one of the following methods:

•

In the Offset field, select List from the pop-up menu and then select an option from the list. If you

• select Nearest from the list, the software navigates you to the offset nearest to your current position.

Key in a value.

Enter a negative value for an offset to the left of the centerline.

Enter a positive value for an offset to the right of the centerline.

Tips

♦

If you select an offset from the list, for all subsequent station values, the offset value is

♦ updated to reflect any widening or interpolation.

If you enter an offset value, that value is maintained for all subsequent station values, even when the entered value corresponds to a value in the list.

Consider the following diagram. If you select offset 5 m at station 0 m, the offset value is updated to follow the solid line for subsequent stations. The value changes from offset 5 m to offset 8 m.

If you enter offset 5 m for the offset, the offset follows the dashed line. The offset of 5 m is maintained for subsequent stations.

284

Staking out a Side Slope Relative to an Alignment

To define and stake a side slope for a Trimble road:

1. From the main menu, select Survey / Stakeout / Roads.

2. Highlight the road name and tap Stakeout.

Tip - If you are warned that the road is incomplete or invalid return to

Complete the appropriate fields to define the Side slope.

road. Open each component defining the road and tap Accept. This will validate the component and report any errors in the definition. Use the editing functionality to resolve the error.

3. In the Stake field, select Side slope from alignment.

4. Enter a value in the Antenna/Target height field and make sure that the Measured to field is set correctly.

5. Entering a value in the Stationing field. For more information, see the section

Selecting a station in

Stakeout Roads.

6. Select a Hinge derivation method and complete the appropriate fields. The following diagram explains the three hinge derivation methods:

Key to the above diagram:

285

1 - Offset and elevation. Enter an offset (4) from the horizontal alignment, and the elevation (5) of the hinge position.

2 - Offset and slope. Enter an offset (6) from the horizontal alignment, and the slope value (7) from the intersection of the horizontal and vertical alignments to the hinge position.

3 - Offset and vertical distance. Enter an offset (8) from the horizontal alignment, and the vertical difference (9) from the intersection of the horizontal and vertical alignments to the hinge position.

Note - If the road definition consists of only a horizontal alignment, the only hinge derivation method available is Offset and elevation.

9. If required, enter values in the

fields.

10. Select Start and use the graphical display to navigate to the point.

The graphical display in the plan view shows your current position along with the target. Also displayed is a dashed line that connects the side slope catch position - the point where the side slope intersects with the ground-to the side slope hinge position. The calculated slope value (in blue) and the design slope value is displayed at the top of the screen.

11. Tap XS to view the

If you are staking to a catch point

12.

with construction offsets, navigate to the catch point and then tap

Apply to add the construction offsets. You are prompted to apply the offsets from your current position. If you are not on the catch position, select No, navigate to the catch position and then tap

Apply again.

If you want to store the catch position and the construction offset, see

Only the road files in the current project folder are available for stake out.

13. Mark the point with a stake.

14. When the point has been marked, you can measure it as an As-staked point by tapping Enter to go into the Stakeout / Point screen.

Note - To also stake the appropriate hinge position, tap Select>> and select either the Hinge point

(Cut) or Hinge point (Fill) option.

Staking Roads from GENIO Files

The Trimble Survey Controller software enables you to stake out a road from a GENIO file by the following methods:

Position on road

286

Along a string

Station on string

The following tips help you to understand how to graphically activate the three methods of staking out a

GENIO road:

•

By default, the Trimble Survey Controller software is in the Position on road method until you select

• a string to stake or a position to stake.

To select a string to stake, tap the linework that represents a string in the plan view.

•

To select a string and station to stake, tap the circle that represents the position in the plan view. Once

you activate the string and station method, the cross section

view is available. You can also

• graphically select positions from that view.

To return to the Position on road method, tap in a clear space to clear the current selection, or reselect

• the current selection.

For all three methods, the current method is indicated in the title banner.

•

To graphically activate a method, you must be in the plan view selection screen that appears immediately after you select the GENIO file and Group, and tap Start.

Tip - If the master string has been excluded (the master string appears greyed out in the plan view and does not appear in the cross section view) and you want to stake it out, return to the Group option, tap and hold in the graphics view and then select

Exclude master at stakeout from the pop-up menu.

Note - You must specify a coordinate system before you can stake out roads with the Trimble Survey

Controller software.

Tip - To improve performance when loading large GENIO files increase the available memory. The following is an indication of loading times for GENIO files:

For a 1 MB GENIO file the load time is approximately 20 seconds

For a 3 MB GENIO file the load time is approximately 1 minute

Group strings

To define a new group of strings that describe a road to be staked:

1. From the Group strings option tap New and then enter a Group name.

2. From the graphics window, tap strings to select them. Alternatively, drag a box outline to select multiple strings. Selected master strings are shown as solid red circles. Selected sub strings are shown

287

as solid blue circles. Tap a selected string to deselect it.

3. To clear your current selection or to undo your last selection, tap and hold in the graphics window and then select the appropriate option from the pop-up menu.

4. To select strings from a list of string names, tap and hold in the graphics window and then select List

selection from the pop-up menu. Tap the string names you want to select. Selected strings appear in the list with a check mark next to them. To clear your current selection, tap Clear.

Tip - To activate the pop-up menu if the touch screen has been disabled, press the space bar.

Notes

•

• the same geometry as the 12D string and positions every 5 meters / feet.

Because the station values for 3D and 5D strings are defined relative to the selected 6D string, select

• strings for the group that obviously define a road.

• along the master string.

Unselected master and geometry strings appear as open red circles. Unselected sub strings (3D and

•

5D) appear as open dark gray circles.

Tap and hold on a string to browse the string name.

•

To define a new 3D string, tap and hold in the graphics view and select

New string from the pop-up

• menu. This option is not available until you have selected a master (6D) string.

To exclude the master string, tap and hold in the graphics view and select

Exclude master at stakeout

from the pop-up menu.

Exclude Master at stakeout

If the Master string (6D) has a vertical geometry that is unrelated to the road design, you can exclude this string when staking out.

To do this:

•

From the Group strings

option, tap and hold in the graphics window and from the pop up menu select

Exclude master at stakeout.

The master string will still be part of the group and will be used to calculate the station values at stakeout.

At stakeout, the master string will appear greyed out in the plan graphical selection screens and does not appear in the cross section view. The master string will also be unvailable from the string selection list.

Tip - To ensure that the master string is available at stakeout, clear Exclude master at stakeout.

288

New Strings

Use this function to

define

a new string,

edit a string you have defined, or delete

a string.

Defining a new string

1. From the Group strings option, create a new group or edit an existing group.

2. Tap and hold on the screen and then select New string from the pop-up menu.

3. Enter a string name.

4. Select the string from which the new string will be derived.

5. Select a string derivation method.

6. If the derivation method is Offset and slope or Offset and Vertical diff, enter values that define the new string.

If the derivation method is Offset and calculated slope, the slope value to the new string (4) is the calculated slope between the Derive from string (1) and the Calculated from string (3). The offset (2) is the distance from the derived string. See the following diagram:

7. Tap Accept.

Notes

•

When you define a new group, you must select a master (6D) string before the New string menu

• option is available.

New strings are created as 3D strings.

•

You cannot define a new string relative to a 5D string.

Editing a new string

1. From the Group strings field, select Edit and then select the group containing the string to edit.

2. Tap and hold in the graphics screen and select Edit string from the pop-up menu.

3. Select the string to edit. You can only edit strings that have been defined using the

New string

functionality and that belong to the current group.

4. Edit the details as required.

5. Tap Accept.

Deleting a string

1. From the Group strings field select Edit and then select the group containing the string to delete.

289

2. Tap and hold in the graphics screen and then select Delete string from the pop-up menu.

3. Select the string to delete. You can only delete strings that have been defined using the

New

string function.

4. Tap OK.

Tip - To activate the pop-up menu if the touch screen has been disabled, press the space bar.

Position relative to GENIO road

To determine your current position relative to a GENIO road:

1. From the main menu, select Survey / Survey style / Stakeout / Roads.

2. Highlight the road name and tap Stakeout.

4. Use the

Group strings

option to create and manage a group of strings that define a road. To view a list of existing groups, tap the arrow and select List. To define a new group, select New. You can also rename, edit or delete an existing group.

5. Enter a value in the Antenna/Target height field.

6. Tap Start. The graphical point selection screen appears displaying the road. Because you want to know your position relative to the road, do not select a position to stake.

Tip - When you select Start, the software calculates the station values for all 3D strings relative to the 6D string for the group. The time taken to calculate the station values varies with the number of strings in the group and the length of the road. To improve performance when staking large GENIO files, Trimble recommends that you limit the number of strings in a group.

7. To apply construction offsets, tap and hold in the graphics window and then select Define

construction offsets from the menu. If a vertical offset is specified, the software reports your position relative to the design, as adjusted by the specified vertical offset.

♦

A negative value offsets the design vertically down.

♦

A positive value offsets the design vertically up.

Note - The Vertical Offset value specified here is not applied to a DTM surface.

Tip - To activate the pop-up menu if the touch screen has been disabled, press the space bar.

8. Tap Stakeout.

The graphical display in the plan view shows your current position relative to the road. The base of the screen reports your current position relative to the road in terms of station, offset to the centerline, and vertical distance to the road surface.

To understand how your position is calculated between strings, see

String interpolation.

Tip - To view the

cross section of your current position, tap the icon at the bottom right of the

graphics window. Alternatively, press the [Tab] key on the controller to switch between the plan view and the cross section view.

290

Note - If you are using a conventional instrument, the road values only appear after you take a distance measurement.

If the road consists of only a horizontal and vertical alignment the V.dist value will report the vertical distance to the centerline.

9. You can measure your current position as an As-staked point by tapping Enter to go into the Stake

out point screen.

Stakeout along a string

To stake out a GENIO file road along a string:

1. From the main menu, select Survey / Survey style / Stakeout / Roads.

2. Highlight the road name and tap Stakeout.

4. Use the

Group strings

5. Enter a value in the Antenna/Target height field.

6. Tap Start. The graphical selection screen appears displaying the road.

Tip - When selecting Start the Trimble Survey Controller software calculates the station values for all 3D strings relative to the 6D string for the group. The time taken to calculate the station values varies with the number of strings in the group and the length of the road. To improve performance when staking large GENIO files, Trimble recommends that you limit the number of strings in a group.

7. To select a string from the plan view, do one of the following:

♦

Tap the linework that defines the string.

♦

Tap and hold in the graphics window and then select a string from the list.

♦

Tap and hold in the graphics window and then key in a string name.

Tip - To activate the pop-up menu if the touch screen has been disabled, press the space bar.

Once you select a string, tap the icon in the bottom right corner of the graphics window to view the cross section. From the cross section view, you can select a different string to stake using any of the methods described above. To return to the plan view, tap the icon again. Alternatively, press the [Tab] key on the controller to switch between the plan view and the cross section view.

To define a cross slope, see

To define a subgrade, see Subgrade.

291

Note - If the road includes multiple side slopes that define benched side slopes, only the 5D /

Interface string that is furthest from the centerline will be converted to a side slope.

To apply construction offsets, tap and hold in the graphics window and then select Define construction offsets.

10. Tap Stakeout and then use either the plan or

cross section

graphical display to navigate along the string.

The Trimble Survey Controller software interpolates elevation values along the string. For more

information, see String interpolation.

11. Mark the point with a stake.

Note - For 5D / Interface strings, the target may not coincide with the design position because the target is calculated relative to your current position.

12. When the point has been marked, you can measure it as an As-staked point by tapping Enter to go into the Stakeout / Point screen.

Note - If you are staking a

catch point (5D / Interface string) with construction offsets, navigate to

the catch point and then tap Apply to add the construction offsets. You are prompted to apply the offsets from your current position. If you are not on the catch position, select No, navigate to the catch position and then tap Apply again.

If you want to store the catch position and the construction offset, see

Options and then clear the

Notes

•

If the string selected to stake is a 5D string Trimble Survey Controller converts this string to a side slope. The calculated slope value is defined by the slope between the 5D string and the adjacent 3D string.

Tip - To configure the software to treat a 5D string as a 3D string, select

Auto side slope option.

•

For GENIO files defined from 12D Model, Trimble Survey Controller treats all strings with a name that includes the letters INT as a 5D string and converts the string to a side slope. The calculated slope value is defined by the slope between the interface string and the adjacent 3D string.

Stakeout station on string

To stake out a GENIO file road by the string and station method:

1. From the main menu, select Survey / Survey style / Stakeout / Roads.

2. Highlight the road name and tap Stakeout.

4. Use the

Group strings

option to create and manage a group of strings that define a road. To view a list

292

of existing groups, tap the arrow and select List. To define a new group, select New. You can also rename, edit or delete an existing group.

5. Enter a value in the Antenna/Target height field.

6. Tap Start. The graphical selection screen appears displaying the road.

7. To select a position from the plan view, do one of the following:

♦

Tap the position.

♦

Tap any position and then use the arrow keys on the Trimble controller to navigate to the

♦ position.

Tap and hold in the graphics window and then select a string and station value from the list.

♦

Tap and hold in the graphics window and then key in a string name and station value.

Tip - To activate the pop-up menu if the touch screen has been disabled, press the space bar.

The Trimble Survey Controller software also supports staking nominal offset and station values. To do this, tap and hold in the graphics window, select the string to stake and then key in a numeric value that represents the offset. Similarly, from the Station to stake field, key in a nominal station value. For

more information, see String interpolation.

Once you select a position, tap the icon in the bottom right corner of the graphics window to view the cross section. From the cross section view, you can select a new position to stake using any of the methods described above. To return to the plan view, tap the icon again. Alternatively, press the [Tab] key on the controller to switch between the plan view and the cross section view.

In the plan and cross section views, the bull's-eye icon (double circle) indicates the selected position.

In the plan view, a selected string is shown with solid circles. To browse the string name, tap and hold on a string.

To define a cross slope, see

To define a subgrade, see Subgrade.

To stake relative to a secondary road, see Secondary road.

Note - If the road includes multiple side slopes that define benched side slopes, only the 5D /

Interface string that is furthest from the centerline will be converted to a side slope.

8. To edit the design elevation, tap and hold in the graphical window and then select Edit elevation. To reload an edited elevation, select Reload original elevation from the pop-up menu in the Design

elevation field.

To apply construction offsets, tap and hold in the graphics window and then select Define construction offsets.

293

10.

Tap Stakeout to begin navigating using either the plan or cross section

graphical display to navigate to the point.

Tips

♦

To select the delta display, tap the arrow to the left of the navigation deltas.

♦

To edit the side slope value of a selected 5D / Interface string, tap and hold on the screen and then select Edit side slope from the menu. If there are no values at the top of the navigation screen for design or calculated side slope, this means that ground conditions require the

♦ opposing slope value to be staked. You can edit the null (?) value.

To select a new hinge string for a selected 5D / Interface string, tap and hold on the screen and then select Edit side slope from the menu. From the Hinge string field tap the arrow and then select a new string from the cross section graphics. The current hinge string is shown as a solid blue circle.

11. Mark the point with a stake.

Note - For 5D / Interface strings, the target may not coincide with the design position because the target is calculated relative to your current position.

12. When the point has been marked, you can measure it as an As-staked point by tapping Enter to go into the Stakeout / Point screen.

Note - If you are staking a

catch point (5D / Interface string) with construction offsets, navigate to

If you want to store the catch position and the construction offset, see

Options and then clear the

Notes

•

Tip - To configure the software to treat a 5D string as a 3D string, tap

Auto side slope option.

•

Staking relative to a secondary road

This function enables stakeout details from a secondary road to be referenced to a position being staked on a

294

primary (current) road. See the following diagram:

To do this:

1. From the main menu, select Survey / Survey style / Stakeout / Roads.

2. Highlight the road name and tap Stakeout.

To define the primary and secondary groups, select the Group strings option.

4. Select the primary road (group) to stake.

5. Enter a value in the Antenna/Target height field.

6. Tap Start. The primary road is displayed. Select the position to stake.

7. From either the plan or cross section view, tap and hold in the graphics window and then select Select

secondary group from the menu. From the list of groups, select the group representing the secondary road. The secondary road appears as unavailable in the plan view. From the plan view, you cannot select positions to stake on a secondary road.

8. From either the plan or cross section view, tap and hold in the graphics window and then select View

secondary cross section from the menu. From the displayed cross section for the secondary road (1), tap the line (3) preceding the position you want to stake. A green line is projected to the stake position on the primary road (2).

Note - Stake details for the secondary road reported in the As staked deltas include:

♦

V.dist to road (4)

♦

Horizontal construction offset (calc'd) (5)

♦

Distance to centerline (6)

10. Tap Accept to confirm your selection.

11. Press Stakeout to begin navigating using either the plan or

cross section graphical display to navigate

to the point.

12. Mark the point with a stake.

13. When the point has been marked, you can measure it as an As-staked point by tapping Enter to go into the Stakeout / Point screen.

String interpolation

The following rules apply to keyed-in station values:

•

For a 6D string elevation values are computed by linear interpolation for station positions between the

6D points. However, if there is a 12D string coincident with the 6D string, the software uses the

295

vertical alignment data available in the 12D string to compute the elevation values for station

• positions between the 6D string points.

For a 3D string elevation values are computed by linear interpolation for station positions between the

•

3D points.

Interpolation between points along a spiral is calculated using a clothoid spiral for 12D and 6D strings and approximated for 3D strings.

When measuring your position relative to a GENIO road or where your station and offset are nominal values your position is computed by linear interpolation from the nearest positions on adjacent strings.

In all situations where your position is interpolated, closer station intervals give greater accuracy.

Staking Roads from LandXML Files

The Trimble Survey Controller software enables you to stake out a road from a LandXML file.

Only the road files in the current project folder are available for stake out.

To do this:

1. From the main menu, select Survey / Survey style / Stakeout / Roads.

2. Highlight the road name and tap Stakeout.

3. If the file contains multiple roads select the road to be staked. To view a list of available roads, tap the arrow and then select List.

Select the station to be staked from the Stationing

field.

5. If the road contains multiple surfaces, select the surface to be staked out. To view the available surfaces, tap the arrow and then select List.

6. Enter a value in the Antenna/Target height field.

7. Select the offset to be staked out from the

Offset

field.

8. To edit the design elevation, tap the arrow. To reload an edited elevation, select Reload original

elevation from the pop-up menu in the Design elevation field.

10.

To apply construction offsets, tap and hold in the graphics window and then select Construction offsets.

11. Select Start and use the graphical display to navigate to the point.

12. To view the

cross section of the selected station, tap XS.

To define a cross slope, see

Station offset (available for roads from a GENIO file only)

12. Mark the point with a stake.

13. When the point has been marked, you can measure it as an As-staked point by tapping Enter to go into the Stakeout / Point screen.

Note - You must specify a coordinate system before you can stake out roads with the Trimble Survey

Controller software.

Warning - Do not stake out points and then change the coordinate system or perform a calibration. If you do,

296

these points will be inconsistent with the new coordinate system and any points computed or staked out after the change.

Selecting a station

You can select a station by one of the following methods:

•

Select from the list in the Stationing field pop-up menu.

•

Key in a value.

Note - Station equations are supported with the zone displayed after the station value.

Selecting an offset

You can select an offset by one of the following methods:

•

In the Offset field, select List from the pop-up menu and then select from the list.

•

Key in a value.

Enter a negative value for an offset to the left of the centerline; enter a positive value for an offset to the right of the centerline.

Note - You can key in a nominal station and offset to stake but, if the station value does not match those in the list, no surface will be available.

Specifying Construction Offsets

A point to be staked can be offset by a:

•

Horizontal offset

•

Vertical offset

•

When you stake a side slope, select the Store both catch and construction offset check box if you want to measure and store the catch position.

Tips

•

Construction offsets are job-specific. That is, a construction offset specified for a road is not used for

• the same road when it is accessed from a different job.

Construction offsets are format-specific. That is, a construction offset specified for a road is not used

• for roads of the other two road formats.

Construction offsets are not road-specific. That is, a construction offset specified for a road is used

• for all roads of the same format in the same job.

Construction offsets are not survey session-specific. That is, a construction offset specified for a road is used for subsequent survey sessions.

297

Horizontal construction offsets

You can offset a point horizontally where:

•

A negative value offsets the point towards the centerline (in).

•

A positive value offsets the point away from the centerline (out).

Use the advanced pop-up arrow ( ) to specify if the offset is to be applied:

• horizontal

• at the slope of the previous element in the cross section

• at the slope of the next element in the cross section

The following diagram shows a Horizontal offset(1) , Slope previous offset(2) and Slope next offset(3) applied to a position. For the Slope previous option, the slope of the offset is defined by the slope of the element (4) before the position (5) selected to stake. For the Slope next option, the slope of the offset is defined by the slope of the element (4) after the position (6) selected to stake.The Vertical offset value in the diagram is

0.000.

Note - For points with zero offset, you cannot apply construction horizontal offsets at the slope value of the previous template element.

Use the advanced pop-up arrow ( ) to specify if the offset is to be applied:

• perpendicular to the master string for the sub string being staked

• perpendicular to the sub string being staked

The following diagram shows a Horizontal offset(1) applied perpendicular to the master string(2) and a

Horizontal offset(3) applied perpendicular to the sub string(4).

Tips

298

•

For Trimble roads where the Stake option is Nearest offset, and an offset other than Nearest is selected, you can define a horizontal offset by your current position. To do this:

♦

Use the advanced pop-up arrow ( ) and select Calculated

♦

Navigate to the position you want to place the stake. Note that the Go left / Go right navigation delta is replaced by the distance to the centerline when the horizontal offset is

♦

Calculated.

Measure and store the point

The calculated horizontal offset is reported in the As staked deltas.

•

For GENIO roads where the stake option is Station on string, you can define a horizontal offset by the distance from the selected position to the master string. To do this:

♦

Use the advanced pop-up arrow ( ) and select At string

♦

Navigate to the target which will be at the master string

♦

Measure and store the point

The calculated horizontal offset is reported in the As staked deltas.

This option is not available if the string being staked is a 5D string or if the horizontal offset is applied perpendicular to the sub string.

•

For GENIO roads where the stake option is Station on string or Along string, you can define a horizontal offset by the distance from the selected position to your current position. To do this:

♦

Tap the advanced pop-up arrow ( ) and then select Calculated.

♦

Navigate to the position where you want to place the stake. Note that the Go left / Go right

♦ navigation delta is replaced by the calculated horizontal construction offset.

Measure and store the point

The calculated horizontal offset is reported in the As staked deltas.

This option is not available if the horizontal offset is applied perpendicular to the sub string.

Notes

•

If you enter a value for the horizontal offset on the centerline (at offset 0.00 m), a negative value

• offset is to the left.

Construction offsets are not automatically applied to a sideslope offset. For more information, see

staking a Catch point.

Vertical construction offsets

You can offset a point vertically where a:

•

A negative value offsets the point vertically down.

•

A positive value offsets the point vertically up.

299

In the Vertical offset field, use the advanced pop-up arrow ( ) to specify if the offset is to be applied:

• vertically

• perpendicular to the element in the cross section before the point being staked

The following diagram shows a Vertical offset applied vertically(1) and a Vertical offset applied perpendicular(2) to the previous cross section element(3).

Station construction offsets

For roads derived from a GENIO file you can offset a point along the station of the selected string where a.

•

A positive value offsets the point in the direction of increasing station (Forward).

•

A negative value offsets the point in the direction of decreasing station (Backward).

Notes

•

You cannot apply a Station offset to a 5D string that represents the catch position.

•

The Station offset respects the geometry of the string being staked.

Cross Section View

For Trimble roads and roads from a LandXML file:

•

Tap XS to view the cross section of the selected station.

For roads from a GENIO file:

•

Tap the icon in the bottom right corner of the graphics window to change between the plan and cross section views.

The cross section that appears is orientated in the direction of increasing station. Your current position and the target are shown. If the target has construction offsets specified, the smaller single circle indicates the selected position and the double circle indicates the selected position adjusted for the specified construction offset(s).

The construction offset(s) appear as green lines.

When you view the cross section, the appropriate cut or fill side slope appears for the side of the road that you are currently on.

300

For all road formats, see

Cross slope to graphically define a cross slope.

For roads defined in a GENIO file, see

Subgrade

to graphically define a subgrade.

Catch Point

The catch point is the point where the design side slope intersects with the ground.

The actual intersection position of the side slope with the existing ground surface - the catch point-is determined iteratively (by repetition). The Trimble Survey Controller software calculates the intersection of a horizontal plane passing through the current position, and either the cut or fill side slope, as shown in the following diagram , where x

is the Go Right/Left value.

The graphical display in the plan view, shows the calculated catch position. The calculated slope value (in blue) and the design slope value appears at the top of the screen.

View the cross section for further graphical navigation. The cross section is displayed looking in the direction of increasing station. Your current position and the calculated target are indicated. A line is drawn (in blue) from the hinge position to your current position to indicate the calculated slope.

If the catch point has construction offsets specified, these appear in the cross-section view as green lines. The smaller single circle indicates the calculated catch position and the double circle indicates the selected position adjusted for the specified construction offset(s). The construction offsets appear only after you have applied them.

Note - For side slope offsets where the slope changes between templates, the Trimble Survey Controller software calculates the side slope for intermediate stations by interpolating the slope value.

From the Confirm staked deltas screen (or Review current job ) tap Report

to view the Catch point deltas

report screen.

The Select softkey (applicable to Trimble roads only)

The following table explains the Select menu options for a side slope.

Option

Catch point

(Auto)

Catch point

Description

The Trimble Survey Controller software selects the side slope (cut or fill) to intersect with the ground. This is the default.

Fixes the side slope as a cut side slope.

301

(Cut)

Catch point

(Fill)

Hinge point

(Cut)

Hinge point

(Fill)

Fixes the side slope as a fill side slope.

Stakes out the base of the cut side slope. This is the most direct way to select the hinge point if the template includes a ditch offset.

Stakes out the start of the fill side slope.

Catch Point Staked Deltas

If you have the View before storage check box in the Stakeout options selected, the Confirm staked deltas screen appears before you store the point.

Note - The value in the S.dist to hinge + Constr off field includes any construction offset values specified and reports the slope distance from the hinge to the as-staked position. The value is null (?) if there is no horizontal construction offset specified or the horizontal construction offset is applied horizontally.

Tip - Tap Report to view the Catch point deltas report screen. This screen shows the horizontal and vertical distances from the catch point to the end of each template element, up to and including the centerline. If the template includes a cut ditch, the report includes the hinge position at the toe of the cut slope. The reported values exclude any construction offset specified.

The following diagram explains some of these fields.

Where:

A = Distance to center line

B = Horizontal distance to hinge point

C = Vertical distance to hinge point

D = Slope

E = Slope distance to hinge point

F = Horizontal construction offset

G = Ditch offset

H = Hinge point

J = Catch point

302

View before storage. For more information, see

As-Staked Point Details.

Defining a cross slope

You can use this special construction offsetting tool with Trimble, GENIO, and LandXML roads. Activate it graphically from the cross section view when in selection mode for GENIO roads and when in stakeout mode for Trimble and LandXML roads. Cross sloping enables you to stake two positions in a single operation, as shown in the following diagram:

To do this:

1. From the cross section view tap and hold and select Define construction offsets and then select a horizontal offset method, typically Slope, and enter a horizontal offset.

2. The smaller single circle (8) indicates the selected position and the double circle (6) indicates the selected position adjusted for the specified construction offsets. The construction offset(s) appear as a green line (7).

3. Tap the line (1) that will define the cross slope. From the pop-up menu select Define cross slope and optionally enter a Cross slope offset.

Note - For Trimble and LandXML roads, when you tap the line, the system immediately defines the cross slope. There is no pop-up menu.

4. The selected line appears as a bold green line. A dashed green line (2) extends from the selected line to intersect with a vertical line (4) at the target stake (3).

5. Navigate to the target and then stake the position.

6. From the Confirm staked deltas screen use the V.Dist. cross slope value (5) to mark the stake with the second position.

Note - The defined cross slope applies to all subsequent stations. To de-activate the cross slope function, tap the selected line (1).

Defining a subgrade

This special subgrade calculation tool for GENIO roads is activated graphically from the cross section view when in selection mode. It enables you to stake a position at an offset to a line, as shown in the following

303

diagram:

To do this:

1. From the cross section view, tap the line (1) that will define the subgrade. The selected line appears green and bolded.

2. From the pop-up menu, select Define subgrade.

3. Enter the depth to subgrade (2) where the depth is from the selected line to the subgrade surface.

4. The dashed green line (3) that appears is parallel to the line selected and offset by the depth to the subgrade. The line extends to intersect with all encountered lines in the cross section. The single circles (4) indicate the computed positions.

5. Tap the computed position that you want to stake.

6. Navigate to the target and then stake the position.

Note - The defined subgrade applies to all subsequent stations. To de-activate the subgrade function, tap the selected line (1).

Fine and Coarse Modes - GPS Stakeout

Choose either the fine or coarse mode when navigating to a point. Use Fine or Coarse in the Stakeout graphical display to change from one to the other:

•

Fine appears when the Trimble Survey Controller software is in coarse mode. Tap it to go into fine mode.

•

The display updates at a rate of one position per second, and the precision of the position is higher.

Coarse appears when the Trimble Survey Controller software is in fine mode. Tap it to go into coarse mode.

The display updates at a rate of five positions per second, and the precision of the position is lower.

Note - When you tap Fine the graphical display screen zooms in and magnifies the display by the zoom factor specified in the survey style.

Note - When you get within 1 foot (0.3048m) of the point, the stakeout mode will automatically change to

fine mode. This can be disabled by unselecting the Auto change to Fine setting in the stakeout section of the

RTK survey style.

304

Survey - Tunnels

Tunnel: Overview

Use the Tunnels option to scan or manually measure positions in a tunnel relative to a

keyed in

or imported

tunnel definition.

Note - The survey tunnel functionality is available only if you have the Trimble Survey Controller

Engineering option (PN 90100-02, 90100-03) enabled on your controller.

Keyed-in tunnels are saved to the current project folder as 'tunnel name'.txl. Tunnels are available for all jobs in the current project folder.

To use a file saved to the current project folder in another project, use Windows Explorer to copy or move the file to the appropriate project folder.

For more information on scanning positions in a tunnel, see Auto scanning positions in a tunnel.

For more information on manually measuring positions in a tunnel, see

Manual measuring positions in a tunnel.

Notes

•

The Trimble Survey Controller software defaults to tracking mode when scanning and measuring in a

• tunnel. If you select standard mode, you achieve better quality but slower measuring times.

The Trimble Survey Controller software Survey / Tunnel option supports Trimble VX/S Series instruments.

Importing Tunnels

You can convert a LandXML file that defines a tunnel to a Trimble txl file for use in the Trimble Survey

Controller software. The LandXML file is converted using the [ASCII File Generator] utility program

(available on the Trimble Survey Controller CD).

Before you can convert a LandXML file, you must copy the [LandXML To TunnelXML.xsl] file from the

[Trimble Survey Controller\Utilities\Export Definitions] folder on the Trimble Survey Controller CD to the

[\Trimble Survey Controller\Custom ASCII Files] folder on your office computer.

To convert a LandXML file to a txl file:

1. On the office computer, select [Start / Programs / Trimble Data Transfer / ASCII File Generator] to start the [ASCII File Generator] utility program.

2. From the Source JobXML or Job file field, select Browse. Set the File of type field to All files. Browse to the appropriate folder and then select the LandXML file to convert.

305

3. From the Output format field, select the [LandXML To TunnelXML] style sheet.

4. Select OK.

5. From the User Value Input screen, enter the index of the tunnel surface to be converted where the default index 1 is the first surface in the LandXML file, 2 is the second surface in the file, and so on.

6. Select OK.

7. Confirm the Save in folder and File name for the txl file and then select Save.

8. When done, select Close.

Use the ActiveSync technology to copy the txl file to the controller.

Tip - To create txl files for other surfaces in the LandXML file, repeat steps 1 through 8. Enter the appropriate index value for the tunnel surface.

Auto Scanning Positions in a Tunnel

Auto scan measures points at a defined scan interval for selected stations. The resulting positions are compared to the design template for that station.

Notes

•

Auto scan defaults to tracking mode for each scan but will work in standard mode.

•

When a scan starts, the DR target height and prism constant are automatically set to 0.00.

To auto scan positions in a tunnel:

1. From the main menu, select Survey / Tunnels and then select the tunnel name from the list. Tap OK.

The plan view displays the horizontal alignment of the tunnel, and the instrument position and current direction. A black open circle indicates each station as defined by the station interval.

Note - The station interval is defined when you key in the start point for the horizontal alignment.

See

keying in a horizontal alignment.

Tip - To add a station that is not defined by the station interval, tap and hold on the screen and then select Add station from the menu.

The mode defaults to Auto scan, as shown in the top left of the screen.

2. To define a scan, select stations to scan using one of the following methods:

♦

Tap and hold on the screen and then select from the list in the Select stations field.

♦

Tap indivdual stations.

♦

Drag a box around the stations.

Selected stations defining a scan are indicated as solid blue circles.

Tap a station to deselect it. Alternatively, tap and hold on the screen and then select Clear selection to clear all stations.

306

Note - Stations shown greyed out have no vertical alignment or no template assigned and cannot be selected for scanning.

Tip - As an alternative to defining a scan from the plan view, you can view a station to scan from the cross section view, tap and hold on the screen and then select Scan current station.

5. Tap Start and then set the Start point name, Point code, Scan interval, and EDM timeout from the

Settings screen.

6. Tap Accept and then set the Station, Overbreak, and Underbreak tolerances from the Tolerances screen.

7. Tap Accept. The Trimble Survey Controller software begins scanning the first station.

Tap Pause to pause the scan; tap Continue to resume scanning. Tap Stop to end the scan before it is completed. While paused, you can select any scanned position to view the deltas.

Tip - To view the cross section that shows the design tunnel, points to be scanned, and the scanned positions, select the icon at the bottom right of the screen. Points to be scanned are defined by the scan interval, and include the start and end points that define each element in the template. For each scanned point, the overbreak, underbreak, and delta station values are displayed. Each scanned position appears as a green circle (if within tolerance), or a red circle (if not within tolerance).

Once all points for the current station are scanned, the Trimble Survey Controller software automatically advances to the next station until all selected stations are scanned.

Tip - When in the cross section view, tap the up arrow (next station) or tap the down arrow (previous station), to review other stations while still scanning. The station being scanned is indicated in the top left of the screen. The station being viewed is indicated at the top center of the screen.

8. Once all points for all selected stations are scanned, results show which stations have errors. You can expand stations with errors to see the number of points scanned, the number skipped, and the number of points outside tolerance. You can expand this last record to see the number of overbreak, underbreak, and delta station points.

Tip - The plan view shows the scanned stations. Stations with no errors appear as solid green circles, while those with errors appear as solid red circles.

9. Tap Close to finish.

Tip - After a scan is completed, you can do the following:

♦

To review a summary for each station, return to the plan view, tap and hold on the screen and

♦ then select Results.

To see details for the displayed station, select Details from the cross section view. See also

♦

Review tunnel.

To edit the tolerance values, return to the plan view, tap and hold on the screen and then select Tolerances. The Station, Overbreak, and Underbreak deltas are updated to reflect the new tolerance values.

307

Manually Measuring Positions in a Tunnel

Use manual measurement to:

•

Measure a position that could not be measured by a scan.

•

Delete

a scanned or manually measured position.

Manual measurement

To perform a manual measurment:

1. From the main menu, select Survey / Tunnels and then select the tunnel name from the list. Tap OK.

The plan view of the tunnel appears.

2. Tap and hold on the screen and then select Manual measure from the pop up menu.

Tip - The measurement method appears in the top left of the screen.

3. Select a station to measure using one of the following methods:

♦

Tap and hold on the screen and then select a station from the list in the Select stations field.

♦

Tap an indivdual station.

The selected station appears as a red circle.

4. To view the cross section, select the icon at the bottom right of the screen.

5. Aim the instrument at the position you want to measure and then tap Store. Alternatively, tap the location that you want to measure. The instrument automatically turns to that position.

Deleting points

To delete a measured position:

1. From the cross section view, tap a point to select it. The selected point is indicated with a black circle.

To deselect the point, tap off it. Alternatively, tap and hold on the screen and then select Clear selection.

2. Tap Delete.

Tip - To restore deleted points, tap and hold on the screen and then select Restore deleted points.

Note - When you select a point for deletion, the instrument target will be the design position for that point. If you select Store immediately after deleting the point, the instrument remeasures the design position for the deleted point.

308

Reviewing Tunnels

To review a scan:

1. From the main menu, select Files / Review tunnel and then select the tunnel name from the list. Tap

OK. The plan view of the tunnel appears.

Stations with no errors appear as solid green circles, while those with errors appear as solid red circles.

Tip - To see the overbreak, underbreak, and delta station tolerances specified for the scan, tap and hold on the screen.

2. To view a summary for each station, select Results.

♦

To view the number of points scanned, the number of points within tolerance, and the number

♦ of points outside tolerance, expand the records for scanned stations.

To view the number of points in overbreak, underbreak, and delta station, you can expand the record for the number of points outside tolerance.

3. To view the current cross section showing the design tunnel and scanned positions, select the icon at the bottom right of the screen.

♦

To see the overbreak, underbreak, and delta station values, select a scanned position.

♦

Tap other points to view their details. Each scanned position appears as a green circle (if within tolerance) or a red circle (if not within tolerance).

Tip - To delete a selected point, tap the backspace key. Alternatively, tap and hold on the screen and then select Delete point. To restore deleted points, tap and hold on the screen and then select Restore deleted points.

Tip - To deselect it, tap off the point. Alternatively, tap and hold on the screen and then select Clear selection.

4. To view details for a selected point, tap Details. Each scanned point in the current cross section is listed and those with errors are indicated as outside tolerance. For each point, the offsets, grid, underbreak, overbreak, and delta station values are displayed.

♦

To view the horizontal and vertical offsets from the intersection of the horizontal and vertical

♦ alignments to the scanned position, you can expand the Offsets record.

To view the north, east, and elevation values for the measured positons, you can expand the

Grid record.

Tip - If you edit the tolerance values, the deltas are updated. To do this, tap and hold on the screen and then select Tolerances.

Note - All scanned and measured points are face 1 measurements and are stored in the database. To review them, go to

Files / Review current job.

309

Survey Configuration

Configuration Menu

Use this menu to:

•

Change the language.

•

Switch on or off sound events.

•

Configure Bluetooth connections.

•

Create and edit feature and attribute libraries.

•

Create and edit survey styles.

•

Create dial profiles for use with cellular modems.

•

View the version number, serial number, authorization key and software warranty expiry.

For more information, see:

Bluetooth

Feature and Attribute Library

Survey Styles

Dial Profiles

Options

Survey Styles

Survey Styles define the parameters for configuring and communicating with your instruments, and for measuring and storing points. In a GPS survey, the Survey Style instructs the base and rover receivers to

perform the functions required for a specific survey type.

This whole set of information is stored as a template that can be called up and re-used when necessary.

If there is only one survey style, it is automatically selected. Otherwise, choose one from the list that appears when you select Configuration / Survey styles.

You can use the styles supplied with the system without configuring them, but you can change default settings as required. The 5600 3600 style works with both the Trimble 5600 and Trimble 3600 instruments. Trimble

Survey Controller detects the instrument that you are connected to and automatically configures the appropriate controls.

Set the appropriate

Options

to view and use Survey Styles.

To change the configuration of the Trimble Survey Controller software for different types of survey, select

310

Configuration / Survey Styles from the main menu.

For more information, see:

Integrated Surveying

Conventional Survey

FastStatic Survey

Postprocessed Kinematic Survey

Real-Time Kinematic and Infill Survey

Real-Time Kinematic Survey

Real-Time Kinematic and Data Logging

Software Options

To view a list of the available software options, select Configuration / Options from the main menu.

Some options are supplied as standard with all systems and can be enabled or disabled to show or hide functionality in the software. Other options are chargeable upgrades that can be changed only with an authorization key.

The following are standard options that are available with all systems:

•

GPS surveying

•

TS surveying

•